GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide - Portland State Universityweb.pdx.edu/~emch/gps/Geo3.pdf · GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ... can transfer to

eration GuideMore...

ration Guideration Guideration Guideration Guide

to hide the Contents ofthe GeoExplorer 3Operation Guide.

ards after retracing your steps,retrace your steps.

he documentation.

xplorer 3 Operation Guide.

peration Guide (this page).

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Op

Using the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 OpeUsing the GeoExplorer 3 Ope

Click to view the Contents of Clickthe GeoExplorer 3Operation Guide.

Click PgUp to go up a page, Fwd to go forwPgDn to go down a page, and Back to

Click to go to the first page of the Index in t

Click to print a page (or pages) of the GeoE

Click to return to Using the GeoExplorer 3 O

Click to close the documentation.

eration Guide

u type in a software screen or

GeoExplorer 3 keypad.

d on the GeoExplorer 3 screen.

current topic. Click the PgDnmove to the remaining

llow a link: Position theer over green or red text.anges to

the mouse to go to the pageining the highlighted topic.


FontsThis font and color represents information that yowindow.

d is an example of a hardware key that you press on the

This font and color represents messages displaye

indicates more information about thebutton at the bottom of the screen toinformation.

green text indicates a link to a relatedtopic.

To fopointIt ch

Clickconta

red text indicates a link to theglossary.

More...

eration Guide

s, and Tipsformation and indicate its nature

ury or unrecoverable data loss.

mage or software error.

ject to increase your knowledge

can help you make better use of


Warnings, Cautions, NoteWarnings, cautions, notes, and tips draw attention to important inand purpose.

WARNING Warnings alert you to situations that could cause personal inj

CAUTION Cautions alert you to situations that could cause hardware da

NOTE Notes give additional significant information about the subor guide your actions.

TIP Tips indicate a shortcut or other time- or labor-saving hint thatthe product.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview 4

I: I: I: I: SYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWSYSTEM OVERVIEWThis System Overview provides general information about the GeoExplorer 3® data collectionsystem, its components, and accessories. System Overview is divided into two sections. TheIntroduction explains what the GeoExplorer 3 is and provides an overview of what you can dowith it. Components and Accessories outlines the parts and software that make up theGeoExplorer 3 data collection system.

• Introduction

• Components & accessories

5

system. The topics covered

system?

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview1: Introduction

1111 IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionThis section introduces you to the GeoExplorer 3 data collectioninclude:

• What is the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system?

• What can you do with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection

• GeoExplorer 3c edition

• Using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system

6

3 data

receiver and data collector fore used with a real-time source of™) receiver. It also works with

transfer, data dictionary creation,

rover receiver or as a baserier phase measurements. Usingystem status and satellite

the field. It has an internall GPS receiver. Optionalavailable.


What is the GeoExplorercollection system?The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is an integrated GPSmapping, relocating, and updating GIS and spatial data. It can bdifferential corrections such as Trimble’s Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoBthe GPS Pathfinder® Office software for mission planning, datadata import/export, and postprocessing.

You can operate the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system as astation. You can also collect high-precision data using GPS carthe intuitive user interface you can navigate, collect data, view savailability, and control the GPS receiver.

The GeoExplorer 3 datalogger is designed for handheld use inantenna and power source, and a high-performance 12-channeaccessories, such as external antennas or power kits, are also

7

ction

em are collecting geographice field.

ttributes and GPS position ofone or more data files that youtprocessing and editing. Data

ats.

AD database. You can alsotures.

, or chart—to navigate to specificavigation and provide in-field

ions in the office with the GPSdata collection system to create

More...


What can you do with theGeoExplorer 3 data collesystem?The primary functions of the GeoExplorer 3 data collection systdata, using and updating existing GIS data, and navigating in th

Use the GeoExplorer 3 to accurately and efficiently collect the ageographic points, lines, and areas. This information is stored incan transfer to Trimble’s GPS Pathfinder Office software for poscan then be exported into a wide range of GIS-compatible form

Use the GeoExplorer 3 to update data from an existing GIS or Creview, edit, and update the GPS positions and attributes for fea

Use one of three methods of navigation—a road view, compasslocations. You can use real-time differential GPS to optimize ndifferential accuracy.

It is easy to create or edit data dictionaries and setup configuratPathfinder Office software. Alternatively, use the GeoExplorer 3or edit data dictionaries.

8

r use in the field:

d waypoints

ct positions as you collect data inle with the Beacon-on-a-BeltS providers. To computeOffice software, collect carrier

temporary GPS base station innent base station.

vironmental and resourcen asset management. Forts power poles, record theirare. A maintenance crew canthat need repair.


The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides two maps fo

• The Chart to create waypoints and to navigate to features an

• The Map to view and update features

For greater precision, use real-time DGPS to differentially correthe field. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is compatib(BoB) receiver to provide real-time DGPS, as well as other DGPpositions with even greater accuracy, using the GPS Pathfinderphase data for points, lines, and areas.

You can operate the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system as asituations where it is impossible or impractical to set up a perma

Applications for the GeoExplorer 3 include forestry mapping, enmanagement, disaster assessment, utility inventories, and urbaexample, a power company could build an asset register of all ipositions, their condition and structure, and any attached hardwthen use the GeoExplorer 3 navigation functions to locate poles

9

.

m edition, the following

collection system

ce software

lorer 3 data collection system. To


GeoExplorer 3c editionThis manual describes the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system

If you have purchased the GeoExplorer 3c data collection systefunctionality is not available with your system:

• Map or Chart tabs

• Cable-free communication with the BoB receiver

• Transfer of Trimble SSF data files to the GeoExplorer 3 data

• Transfer of coordinate systems from the GPS Pathfinder Offi

You can upgrade your GeoExplorer 3c edition to the full GeoExpdo this, contact your local Trimble dealer.

10

data

are:

and how to use the keys and

• The NAV section


Using the GeoExplorer 3collection systemThe GeoExplorer 3 firmware is arranged in three sections. They

General operation explains the structure of the three sectionsscreens.

Alternatively, refer to your QuickStart quick reference card.

• The SYS section • The DATA section

11

cessoriescessoriescessoriescessoriesponents:

owing optional accessories:

cting the system.

em cable

lorer 3 external power kit

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide System overview2: Components & accessories

2222 Components Components Components Components & a& a& a& accccThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system has the following com

• The GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector

• GeoExplorer 3 support module

• GPS Pathfinder Office software

• GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide CD

• QuickStart

• Standard accessories

The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system also contains the foll

Before you unpack the components and accessories, see Inspe

• Data collector pouch • Lanyard

• Serial clip • Null mod

• Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver • GeoExp

• External antenna option

12

nspect all contents for visibleged, notify the carrier. Keep the

Trimble. Extra components can

g with instructions for returning

uipment listal power kital antenna kitB) receiver equipment listB) receiver external power kit


Inspecting the systemWhen you receive your GeoExplorer 3 data collection system, idamage (scratches, dents) and if any instruments appear damashipping and packaging material for the carrier’s inspection.

You will need to provide a part number to return a component tobe also be ordered.

All components and part numbers are listed in this manual, alongoods to Trimble.

If you have purchased the … see …GeoExplorer 3 data collection system GeoExplorer 3 full eqGeoExplorer 3 external power kit GeoExplorer 3 externGeoExplorer 3 external antenna kit GeoExplorer 3 externBeacon-on-a-Belt system Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) externalpower kit

Beacon-on-a-Belt (Bo

13

listber for each item included witheful for ordering spare or

Part Number39100-00-ENG38376-0038599185323699638595-0038604-0038598-00-ENG38596-20-ENG38597-20-ENG25110-0039180

More...


GeoExplorer 3 full equipmentThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. This information is usreplacement parts:

Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 data collection system

GeoExplorer 3 data collectorGeoExplorer 3 data collector pouchNull modem cableGeoExplorer 3 data collector lanyardGeoExplorer 3 serial clipGeoExplorer 3 support moduleGeoExplorer 3 QuickStartGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide CDGeoExplorer 3 Release NotesWarranty Activation CardWall power cable

14

pment list

3887434191-28-ENG24177-0134191-2834195-28-ENG34231-28-ENG34192-28-ENG3914239292-00

) 39628-20-ENG

Part Number39100-50-ENG

stem but with different


GeoExplorer 3c edition equi

Power supplyGPS Pathfinder Office software system

Mapping Systems General ReferenceGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 software CDGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 Release NotesGPS Pathfinder Office v2.80 Getting Started GuideGPS Pathfinder Office manual set (optional)

GeoExplorer 3 RTCM/NMEA splitter cable (optional)GeoExplorer 3 hard carrying case (optional)GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide (optional printed manual

Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3c data collection system

(this is the same as the GeoExplorer 3 data collection syfirmware)

15

kitber for each item included withor ordering spare or replacement

Part Number39001-0021754-1017466185323918339182391813918411017


GeoExplorer 3 external powerThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe GeoExplorer 3 external power kit. This information is useful fparts:

Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 External Power Kit

Shoulder carrying pouch12 V camcorder batteryNull modem cableExternal power splitter cableVehicle adaptor power cableCamcorder adaptor power cableCamcorder chargerCamcorder charger cable

16

a kiter of the GeoExplorer 3 externalcement parts:

Part Number39002-00


GeoExplorer 3 external antennThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numbantenna kit. This information is useful for ordering spare or repla

Equipment descriptionGeoExplorer 3 External Antenna Kit

17

er equipment

ber for each item included withers outside the United Statesis useful for ordering spare or

Part Number(United States only)38600-00-ENG38508-0038603388743918025110-0038601-0038602-00-ENG43377

More...


Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivlistThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) system in the United States (customshould refer to the table on the following page). This informationreplacement parts:

Equipment description

Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) systemBoB receiverBoB receiver pouchWall power cablePower supplyWarranty Activation CardPC-BoB softwareBoB Receiver ManualNull modem cable

18

ber for each item included withUnited States. This information

Part Number (outsidethe United States)38600-10-ENG38508-1038603388743918025110-0038601-0038602-00-ENG43377


The following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) system for customers outside theis useful for ordering spare or replacement parts:

Equipment description

Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) systemBoB receiverBoB receiver pouchWall power cablePower supplyWarranty Activation CardPC-BoB softwareBoB Receiver ManualNull modem cable

19

er external

ber for each item included withis useful for ordering spare or

Part Number39003-00174663918139182391843887421756


Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivpower kitThe following table lists the product name and Trimble part numthe Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) external power kit. This informationreplacement parts:

Equipment descriptionBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) External power kit

12 V Camcorder batteryCamcorder adaptor cableVehicle adaptor cable12 V Camcorder chargerWall power cableVehicle splitter cable

20

eld data

ce 12-channel GPS receiver. It isoExplorer 3 you can navigate toute information for point, line,

GeoExplorer 3lector:


The GeoExplorer 3 handhcollectorThe GeoExplorer 3 handheld data collector is a high performana battery-powered unit designed for use in the field. With the Gepoints of interest and also store up to 1 MB of position and attriband area features.

Maintenance and care of yourTo maintain and care for your GeoExplorer 3 handheld data col

• keep the outer surface free of dirt and dust

• keep the connectors free of dirt and dust

• recharge the internal battery when required

21

oduleeen the GeoExplorer 3 and the

support module when theupport module automaticallyin Standby mode.

OTE For pinout details,see Specifications.


GeoExplorer 3 support mThe GeoExplorer 3 support module is used to transfer data betwPC software and also charge the internal battery.

You can put the GeoExplorer 3 handheld into the GeoExplorer 3GeoExplorer 3 is on or off. When powered, the GeoExplorer 3 sdetects that the GeoExplorer 3 is present and, if it is off, puts it

t

N

22

ftwareows 95, Windows 98, Windows

need to manage a datag and GIS data collection

ful Quick Plan Mission Planning

ated with these projects

trol the data collection operationurate, and compatible with your

ollectors.

ing this data onto a vector or

More...


GPS Pathfinder Office soThe GPS Pathfinder Office software runs under Microsoft Wind2000, Windows ME, or Windows NT. It provides all the tools youcollection project, handling data from the entire range of Mappinsystems that use Trimble GPS receivers.

The GPS Pathfinder Office software lets you:

• plan the best times to collect GPS positions, using the powerutility.

• create separate projects to help you manage the data associeffectively and conveniently.

• construct and edit data dictionaries, which can be used to conand which make sure that the collected data is complete, accGIS, CAD package, or database.

• transfer files to and from GPS receivers and handheld data c

• process the GPS positional data to improve its accuracy.

• display and edit collected data in the office, optionally overlayraster background map.

23

D, or database format.

der Office software to make bestsoftware is used to transfer GPSata. The GPS Pathfinder Officeor CAD system.


• export the collected, processed, and edited data to a GIS, CA

• produce a scaled plot as a paper record of the data.

• set up configurations for your GeoExplorer 3 data collector.

The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system uses the GPS Pathfinuse of the data collected in the field. The GPS Pathfinder Officedata to a PC, and then differentially correct, view, and edit the dsoftware also exports the data in a format suitable for your GIS

24

Guide CDGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide


GeoExplorer 3 OperationThe standard GeoExplorer 3 data collection system includes theCD.

The CD is designed to provide you withhands-on learning that is easy andinformative.

It contains:

• an interactive tutorial

• a documentation tutorial

• a GeoExplorer 3 reference guidedetailing every system function

25

to be taken into the field.


QuickStartThe GeoExplorer 3 QuickStart quick reference card is designed

It contains information about:

• the GeoExplorer 3 handheld

• the menu structure

• status bar icons

• satellite information

• basic troubleshooting

26

ed as part of your GeoExplorer 3


Standard accessoriesThe following sections describe the standard accessories providdata collection system.

• Data collector pouch

• Lanyard

• Serial clip

• Null modem cable

27

r 3 handheld data collector anduch fits ergonomically onto your


Data collector pouchThe data collector pouch is provided to protect your GeoExploreenable you to store and transport it easily. The data collector pobelt as shown:

t

28

tor or to the data collector pouchrer 3 as shown:


LanyardThe lanyard can be attached to your GeoExplorer 3 data collecto make it easier to carry. Connect the lanyard to the GeoExplo

29

xplorer 3 data collector to let youto connect to a device that

ou can also use the serial clip toternal power source.


Serial clipThe serial clip is attached to the swipes on the rear of the GeoEconnect to an RTCM device to receive real-time corrections, orreceives NMEA data.

If you do not have a GeoExplorer 3 support module available, yconnect to either your office computer to transfer data, or an ex

NOTE For pinout details, see Specifications.

t

30

oExplorer 3 support module to

lorer 3 data collector to the officeer, where the cable-freerence.


Null modem cableThe supplied DB-9 null modem cable is used to connect the Gethe office computer.

The null modem cable can also be used to connect the GeoExpcomputer using the serial clip, and to connect to the BoB receivtransmission is either not enabled, or not possible due to interfe

31

ccessoriessystem are:


GeoExplorer 3 optional aThe optional accessories for the GeoExplorer 3 data collection

• Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver

• GeoExplorer 3 external power kit

• External antenna option (vehicle and range pole mount)

32

erceiving differential correctionsrmat. The BoB receivera standard RS-232 connection.

oB receiver.


Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receivThe BoB receiver is a belt-mounted MSK receiver capable of refrom DGPS radiobeacons using the RTCM SC-104 standard foretransmits this data both on a low power cable-free link and on

Configure the BoB receiver using the PC-BoB software for the B

33

kita factory-installed Lithium-ion0 hours before needing to be

fe you can purchase the externala rechargeable 12 V camcorder


GeoExplorer 3 external powerThe standard GeoExplorer 3 data collection system comes withbattery. This will provide power for the GeoExplorer 3 for up to 1recharged (less if the backlight is used). For additional battery lipower kit. This lets you power the GeoExplorer 3 receiver frombattery, or from a vehicle. The kit includes:

• Shoulder carrying pouch

• 12 V camcorder battery and charger

• Vehicle power adaptor cable

• Camcorder power adaptor cable

• Power/data splitter cable

34

r 3 handheld data collector,

T


Shoulder carrying pouchThe shoulder carrying pouch can accommodate the GeoExplorea 12 V camcorder battery, and cable accessories:

T

35

able 12 V camcorder batteryours of continuous3 operation, and can be fullyrnight.


12 V camcorder battery and chargerThe rechargeprovides 20 hGeoExplorerrecharged ove

36

er cable or the support module to


Vehicle power adaptor cableThe vehicle power adaptor cable connects the power/data splitta vehicle’s cigarette-lighter socket.

37

plitter cable or the support


Camcorder power adaptor cableThe camcorder power adaptor cable connects the power/data smodule to the camcorder battery.

rr

38

ed through the serial clip while

To serial clip


Power/data splitter cableThe power/data splitter cable allows external power to be receivalso allowing a serial connection to the GeoExplorer 3 receiver.

To other device

To vehicle orcamcorder adaptor

39

SLIDE

ANTENNA

TO REMOVE


External antenna optionIn situations where the internal antenna’s view of thesky is blocked (for example, in a vehicle), or inmultipath conditions, an optional external antenna kitis available. The external antenna kit contains anantenna with a magnetic base and a pole-mountableground plane. Poles are purchased separately.

40

asks that you will perform whenary functions of thearts to the tutorial, three relate to

eed with this tutorial. You needcollection system and how to

for update

e field

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide TutorialIntroduction

II: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALII: TUTORIALThe Tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for some of the tusing the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. Two of the primGeoExplorer 3 are data collection and data update. Of the five pdata collection and two to real-time data update. They are:

NOTE It is important that you read the Introduction before you procto know about the menu structure of the GeoExplorer 3 datause the keypad on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

Data Collection Data Update

• In the office • Preparing

• In the field • Back in th

• Processing the data

41

utorial is based on the following

s and resources. These includecets, lakes, and other resourcesindicating its condition and otherre responsible for collecting new

or Waterstone Park. Then youinder Office software. When then system, you go out to the parkou postprocess the data totional Park GIS.

data using the GeoExplorer 3fer existing data to theou use the GeoExplorer 3 dataerential GPS source to navigate

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide TutorialIntroduction

To help you master the main concepts and tasks involved, the tscenario:

The Waterstone National Park requires an inventory of its assetgates, roads, signs, campgrounds and their amenities, water fauin the park. Information needs to be collected about each entity,specific information. As a Park Ranger, you and your field crew adata, as well as updating the existing GIS data.

Data collection: In this part of the tutorial you create a project fcreate a data dictionary, or list of features, using the GPS Pathfdata dictionary is transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 data collectioand use it to record features and attributes. Back in the office, yachieve better results and export the data to the Waterstone Na

Data update: In this part of the tutorial you update existing GISdata collection system. Before going back to the park you transGeoExplorer 3 and prepare for an update session. In the field, ycollection system and the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) real-time diffback to features and then update the attributes.

42

eate a project and a datae GeoExplorer 3 data collection

lp you prepare to go out to the

e software

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial3: In the office

3333 In the officeIn the officeIn the officeIn the officeBefore going to Waterstone Park to collect data, you need to crdictionary. When the data dictionary is complete, transfer it to thsystem.

Preparing for collection provides step-by-step instructions to hefield and collect data. Topics are:

• Creating a project

• Creating a data dictionary using the GPS Pathfinder Offic

• Data transfer

• Checking the equipment

43

sed tool for processing andyour data collection session and

rojects. Dividing the work in thisul names, and assign separate

mple, you could create a projectpark, or for each month.


Creating a projectThe GPS Pathfinder Office software is a powerful, Windows-bamanaging GPS data. GPS Pathfinder Office lets you easily planprocess the GPS data successfully.

Use the GPS Pathfinder Office software to organize work into pway helps you manage files. You can give all projects meaningffolders for base, export, and backup files.

You can also set up projects for different groups of data. For exafor each major monitoring task, as well as for each region of the

For this tutorial, create a project named Geo3 Tutorial.

For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

44

y using theftware

butes relevant to a particularfeature and its attributes.

ortant. Design a data dictionaryicular, be familiar with any formatto import the data you collect.

reate a data dictionary to collect

es. These include gates, roads,you record for each type ofcondition of a gate are attributes.

More...


Creating a data dictionarGPS Pathfinder Office soA data dictionary contains a description of the features and attriproject or job. It is used in the field to control the collection of a

Understanding how to put together a data dictionary is very impwith your Geographic Information System (GIS) in mind. In partrestrictions imposed by the GIS, otherwise you may not be able

The Waterstone National Park already has a GIS. You need to cnew data, and update existing data, for import to the GIS.

The different park components that you need to map are featurwater faucets, and lakes. The different types of information thatfeature are attributes. For example, the name of a road, or the

45
In this part of the tutorial the following tasks are explained:

• Starting a data dictionary

• Creating a point feature

• Creating a menu attribute

• Creating a numeric attribute

• Creating a line feature

• Creating a text attribute

• Creating a menu attribute with a default value

• Creating an area feature

• Creating a point feature with a date attribute

• Creating the numeric attributes

• Creating a date attribute

• Saving the data dictionary

46

fice software, select Utilities /

the data dictionary that appears

More...


Starting a data dictionary1. To start the Data Dictionary Editor in the GPS Pathfinder Of

Data Dictionary Editor.

2. In the Name field, type Waterstone. This is the title ofon the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

47

good reference. The dialog box


3. In the Comment field, type your name. This is optional, but alooks similar to the following:

48

be used to do an inventory of

More...


Creating a point feature

The first type of feature you are going to create is a gate. It willwhere all the gates are and what condition they are in.

To create a pointfeature:

1. Click New Feature.Make sure that theProperties tab isselected.

2. In the FeatureName field, typeGate.

This is the namethat appears on theGeoExplorer 3handheld when youuse this datadictionary in thefield.

49

efault. A gate is at a singlepriate classification for this

of features. A symbol indicates

here are two attributes for thettribute).


3. In the Feature Classification group, the Point option is the dlocation on the earth’s surface, so a point is the most approfeature. Leave this setting as is.

4. Click OK.

The Data Dictionary Editor screen displays “Gate” in the listthat it is a point feature.

First create the gate point feature and then add the attributes. Tgate feature: Condition (menu attribute) and Lock ID (numeric a

• Creating a menu attribute

• Creating a numeric attribute

50

re is a defined set of options.to enter values in the field and to

is attribute are good, repair, orld, a menu with these three

More...


Creating a menu attribute

Menu attributes are useful when the information you need to stoThis standardizes the entry of information and makes it quickersearch for features in the GPS Pathfinder Office software.

The first attribute of the gate is Condition. The only values for threpaint, so making this a menu attribute is appropriate. In the fievalues appears when you are entering the Condition attribute.

To create a menu attribute:

1. Click New Attribute. The following dialog appears:

2. Select the Menu option and click Add.

The New Menu Attribute dialog appears.

51

ute Name field, type

More...


3. You need to know the condition of the gates, so in the AttribCondition:

52

ears.

More...


4. Click New. The New Attribute Value – Menu Item dialog app

5. In the Attribute Value field, type Good. Click Add.

6. In the Attribute Value field type Repair. Click Add.

7. In the Attribute Value field type Repaint. Click Add.

53

splays the new attribute values:

he New Attribute Type dialog.


8. Click Close to return to the New Menu Attribute dialog. It di

9. Click OK to create this attribute. Then click Close to close t

54

he minimum and maximumlue can save time.

lock ID number identifies whichmber between 1 and 200.

ic Default Values Requirednumeric attributes without

meric Default Values Required.e information, refer to the GPS

and click OK.

this default value, as the lock ID

More...


Creating a numeric attribute

Use a numeric attribute type to enter numeric values in fields. Tvalues help eliminate incorrect entries, and a sensible default va

The next attribute you need to create for the gate is Lock ID. Akey corresponds to which lock in the park. It is recorded as a nu

NOTE Before creating this numeric attribute, make sure the Numercommand is turned off. This is necessary if you are to createdefault values. To turn off this command, select Options / NuThere must be no check mark beside the command. For morPathfinder Office Help.

To create a numeric attribute:

1. In the New Attribute Type dialog, select the Numeric option

2. In the Attribute Name field, type Lock ID.

3. In the Decimal Places field, the default is 0. Do not changenumbers do not have any decimal places.

55
4. In the Minimum field type 1and in the Maximum fieldtype 200, as all lock IDnumbers are between 1and 200. This limits therange of values that youcan enter:

5. Click OK to create thisattribute.

6. Click Close to close theNew Attribute Type dialog.The attributes you creatednow appear in the attributefield.

NOTE When you are in the field, ifyou enter a value outside theminimum/maximum range, anerror message appears on thescreen of the GeoExplorer 3handheld.

56

r this feature.

ns. The default logging intervalrt logging a line feature, the

ntil you end the feature logging.e. An increased logging ratemap of the roads is provided.

More...


Creating a line feature

You need to map the roads in the park, so create a line feature.

To create a line feature:

1. Click New Feature.

The New Feature dialog appears.

2. In the Feature Name field, type Road.

3. In the Feature Classification group, select Line.

4. Select the Default Settings tab to view the logging interval fo

The logging interval is the time between feature GPS positiofor line features is 5 seconds. This means that when you staGeoExplorer 3 logs one GPS position every five seconds, uChange the logging interval to 1 second for the Road featurmakes sure that more data is collected and a more detailed

57

More...


5. Use the LoggingInterval list boxes tochange the logginginterval to 1 second:

6. Click OK to createthis feature.

NOTE When you are in thefield, you can also usethe GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system toedit the logging intervalin Feature settings.

58

tes. There are two attributes forattribute).


Now that you have created the road line feature, add the attributhis feature: Road Name (text attribute) and Speed Limit (menu

• Creating a text attribute

• Creating a menu attribute with a default value

59

es for different occurrences of arial you want to record the nameso a text attribute is appropriate.

d name. To make sure that thethat, in the field, a name must be

an be entered for the attribute.u can change this, but for this

More...


Creating a text attribute

Text attributes are useful when the information to be stored varifeature and when a defined menu list is impractical. For this tutoof each road. There are too many road names to make a menu,It lets you enter letters, numbers, and punctuation, for each roaroad name is entered, set the attribute as required. This meansentered before the road feature can be saved.

To create a required text attribute:

1. Click New Attribute.

The New Attribute Type dialog appears.

2. In the Type field, select Text and click Add.

3. In the Attribute Name field, type Name.

4. The Length field determines the number of characters that cBy default, the length of a text attribute is 30 characters. Yotutorial leave as is.

60

eans that the field crew must


5. In the On Creation group, select the Required option. This menter a value for the Name attribute:

6. Click OK to create this attribute.

61

e

d the speed limit for each of theo a menu attribute is appropriate.ph, so make 10 the defaulteds to be entered only if it is not

d click Add.

More...


Creating a menu attribute with a default valu

The next attribute for the road is Speed Limit. You want to recorroads. The values are defined numbers within a certain range, sMost of the roads in Waterstone Park have a speed limit of 10 mvalue. This saves time in the field, as the speed limit attribute ne10 mph.

To create a menu attribute with a default value:

1. In the New Attribute Type dialog, select the Menu option an

The New Menu Attribute dialog appears.

2. In the Attribute Name field, type Speed Limit.

3. Click New.

The New Attribute Value – Menu Item dialog appears.

4. In the Attribute Value field, type 5 and click Add.

62

e default. To do this, select the

r 20 and 25.

o the New Menu Attribute dialog.l appears in front of 10 to show


5. In the Attribute Value field, type 10 and set this value as thDefault check box and click Add.

6. In the Attribute Value field type 15 and click Add. Repeat fo

7. When you have entered all the values, click Close to return tIt now displays the attribute values you created. An * symbothat it is the default.

8. Click OK to create this attribute.

9. Click Close to close the New Attribute dialog.

63

re to record the location of watere way that you created the Gate

er (numeric attribute), Test Tube


Creating a point feature with a date attribute

The next feature to create is a water faucet. Use this point featufaucets in the park. Create the Water Faucet feature in the samfeature. For more information, see Creating a point feature.

There are three attributes for the Water Faucet feature: ID NumbNumber (numeric attribute), and Date (date attribute).

• Creating the numeric attributes

• Creating a date attribute

64

mber. You will record this number

d the Lock ID attribute. Use the

More...


Creating the numeric attributes

All water faucets in the park are labeled with an identification nuwhen collecting data.

Create the ID Number attribute in the same way that you createfollowing values:

65
Monthly water samples arecollected from the waterfaucets in the park to makesure water is safe for drinking.The samples are collected inpre-numbered test tubes. Thistest tube number is recorded inthe GeoExplorer 3 so thatresults from the lab can becorrectly entered into the GIS.

Create the Test Tube Numberattribute the same way youcreated the Lock ID attribute.Use the following values:

For more information, see Creating a numeric attribute.

66

. You can create this attribute sofaucet feature is collected, the

click OK.

More...


Creating a date attribute

The last attribute for the Water Faucet feature is the date visitedthat it is automatically generated for each faucet. When a watercurrent date is automatically entered as the Date attribute.

To create a Date attribute:

1. In the New Attribute Type dialog select the Date option and

2. In the Attribute Name field, type Date.

67

cted. Select the Auto Generate

xisting one, the GeoExplorer 3

e New Attribute Type dialog.


3. By default, the Auto Generate on Creation check box is seleon Update check box, as well.

When you create a new water faucet feature or update an eautomatically generates the date

4. Click OK to create this attribute, then click Close to close th

68

a feature. You do not need toutes for this feature. Create the, but this time in the New Feature

rtant to save the new data

ta dictionary is automaticallyrstone.ddf.

athfinder Office Help.

More...


Creating an area feature

You need to map the lakes in Waterstone Park, so create an arerecord any information about the lake, so you do not need attribLake feature in the same way that you created the Gate featuredialog select Area in the Feature Classification group.

For more information, see Creating a point feature.

Saving the data dictionary

Once you have added all features and their attributes, it is impodictionary.

To save the data dictionary:

1. Select File / Save As.

The Save As dialog appears. By default, the name of the daused to generate the file name, for example, C:\Pfdata\Wate

2. Click Save.

3. From the menu bar select File / Exit.

For more information about data dictionaries, refer to the GPS P

69

ld, use the GeoExplorer 3 data, or to add features, attributes,


NOTE Create a data dictionary in the office or in the field. In the fiecollection system to create a new customized data dictionaryand values to an existing data dictionary.

For more information, see Data dictionaries.

70

xplorer 3 data collection system,ransfer utility in the GPSe GeoExplorer 3 and the office

uter to the GeoExplorer 3 data

pport module. Make sure that

athfinder Office software. (IfCOMMS form.)

a if the support module is

Transfer.

More...


Data transferYou need to transfer the Waterstone data dictionary to the GeoEso that you can use it in the field to collect data. Use the Data TPathfinder Office software to efficiently transfer data between thcomputer.

To transfer the Waterstone data dictionary from the office compcollection system:

1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExplorer 3 suthe support module is connected to the office computer.

The GeoExplorer 3 is ready to communicate with the GPS Pcommunication fails to take place, check the settings in the

NOTE You do not have to turn on the GeoExplorer 3 to transfer datpowered.

2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Utilities / Data

The Data Transfer dialog appears.

71

the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

er on COM 1 or GIS Dataloggerrt module is connected to) or youandheld.

xplorer 3 handheld.

s. Highlight it and click Open.

More...


3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents

You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Dataloggon COM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the suppocan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h

The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the GeoE

4. Select the Send tab.

5. Click Add and select Data Dictionary from the list.

The Open dialog appears.

6. Browse until the Waterstone.ddf file appears in the list of file

72

onary appears in the Files to

More...


The Open dialog disappears, and the Waterstone data dictiSend list:

73

dheld.

r appears. Click Close to close it.


7. Click Transfer All.

The data dictionary is transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 han

8. A message showing summary information about the transfe

9. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.

74

ke sure that you have enoughxplorer 3 handheld is in theby screen to check the internal

ck the level of the internal power..

t it in the support module, the

ou turn off the GeoExplorer 3it in the support module, thescreen appears. Check that

nal power source is fullyand that data is beinged. When the level of thepower is at its highest, thepower icon appears full (black).


Checking the equipmentBefore going into the field, check the internal power level to mapower to complete the data collection session. When the GeoEGeoExplorer 3 support module and turned off, use the Standpower level.

TIP When the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on, use the Status bar to cheTo view the percentage of remaining power use The Status tab

NOTE If the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is still turned on when you puStandby screen does not appear. The handheld stays on.

When yand putstandbythe interchargedtransferrinternalinternal

Data transfer iconInternal power icon

75

u are ready to go to Waterstones that you should complete. Datactions required to collect point,

ics include:

u need to know about the mainw to use the keypad on the

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial4: In the field

4444 In the fieldIn the fieldIn the fieldIn the fieldThis part of the tutorial uses the data dictionary just created. YoNational Park and collect features. But first there are some taskcollection explains these tasks and gives the step-by-step instruline, and area features, with a variety of different attributes. Top

• Initial tasks

• Collecting data

• Closing a file

NOTE Read the Introduction before proceeding with this tutorial. Yostructure of the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system and hoGeoExplorer 3 handheld.

76

tasks:


Initial tasksBefore starting a data collection session, complete the following

• Turning on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld

• Getting a clear view of the sky

• Checking the GPS status

• Creating a new file

77

handheldrer 3 handheld.

reen appears for a few seconds

isplayed.


Turning on the GeoExplorer 3When you get to the park, press o to turn on the GeoExplo

When the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on a Trimble identification scwhile a short self-test is performed.

The GPS tab always appears after the identification screen is d

78

where you have a clear view ofeoExplorer 3 handheld with the

u. The internal antenna of thecated above the screen. Theeed to be held perfectly level,na facing upwards, notways.

eived from any direction but ifnna the GeoExplorer 3 will notellites and will stop computingsignals can be blocked byeavy tree cover, large vehicles,

itters. Anything that blocks light. GPS signals can go throughglass, but these all weaken the


Getting a clear view of the skyMove to a locationthe sky. Hold the Gscreen towards yoGeoExplorer 3 is loreceiver does not nbut keep the antendownwards or side

Signals can be recyou cover the antelonger track the sapositions. Satellitepeople, buildings, hor powerful transmalso blocks signalsleaves, plastic, andsignal.

79

begins to track visible satellitesck if the GeoExplorer 3 ismetry of the satellites that areout this icon, see Status bar.

se that are being used tohow accurate the GPS positions

n affect your GPS data.

More...


Checking the GPS statusWhen you turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, it automaticallyand to calculate its current position. Use the satellite icon to checomputing GPS positions. It provides information about the geobeing used to compute GPS positions. For more information ab

Use the GPS tab to view the satellites currently tracked and thocalculate the current position. You can also get an indication ofare.

NOTE For further explanation of satellite geometry, and how this cacollection, refer to the Mapping Systems General Reference

80

en appears:

3 is currently tracking.

sing to compute its current GPSlorer 3 is getting signals from, butample, eight satellites are being

ns.

but that the GeoExplorer 3 is

Satellites being used tocompute positions

Satellite geometry indicator

Current position

Minimum levelSkyplot

More...


To view the GPS screen:

1. Presss until the GPS tab is active. The following scre

2. Use the skyplot to check the satellites that the GeoExplorer

Black boxes represent satellites that the GeoExplorer 3 is uposition. Unfilled boxes represent satellites that the GeoExpnot using because the signals are too weak. In the above extracked, and seven are being used to compute GPS positio

NOTE Numbers with no box represent satellites that are available,not receiving signals from.

GPS tab

Signal strengthbar graph

Minimum level

81

). It indicates what direction theay need to calibrate the internal

screen.

signal strength of the satellites. Ifm level, there may be some

e overall quality of the GPSs. When the bar is above thecomputed.


NOTE The skyplot rotates as you change direction (like a compassGeoExplorer 3 is pointing to. (If the skyplot does not rotate, you mcompass—see Calibration.)

Your current GPS position is displayed at the bottom of the

3. Use the signal strength bar graph (on the left), to check thethe strength of a GPS signal is below the configured minimuobstruction blocking the signal.

4. Use the satellite geometry indicator (on the right), to view thpositions. This is determined by the geometry of the satelliteconfigured minimum level indicator GPS positions are being

For more information, see The GPS tab.

82

te a new file:

ers a name in the File field. Yoututorial leave it as it is.

ary that you created in the office

More...


Creating a new fileBefore you can start a data collection session, you need to crea

1. Pressd. The File tab appears:

The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system automatically entcan change the name of the file, but for the purposes of this

2. In the Dictionary field, check that the Waterstone data dictionappears.

83

ed to the GeoExplorer 3

ways associated with that file.dictionary.

file is created and the New

t contains all the features in theyou created in the office.


NOTE The latest data dictionary file and configuration file transferrautomatically become the defaults.

NOTE The data dictionary you select when creating a data file is alOnce the file is created, it is not possible to change its data

3. All information in the form is correct, so press E. Thefeature list appears:

You are now ready to collect data.

The New feature lisdata dictionary that

84

nd you have created a new file,gives step-by-step instructions


Collecting dataThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is tracking satellites aso you are ready to start collecting data. This part of the tutorialfor the following tasks:

• Collecting a point feature

• Collecting a line feature using the Later button

• Collecting a point feature using the Later button

• Collecting an area feature

85

is already highlighted in the Newhe GeoExplorer 3 starts logging

e GeoExplorer 3 will record afigured logging interval set whenifferential correction of the

inder Office software) to produce

lorer 3 starts logging GPSg icon appears at the bottom ofnumber above the icon

y positions have been logged fore.

More...


Collecting a point feature1. The first point feature that you want to collect is a gate. Gate

feature list, so press E . The Gate form appears and tpositions.

You can remain stationary at a point for a period of time. Thnumber of GPS positions during this time, based on the conthe feature was defined in the Data Dictionary Editor. After dpositions, they are averaged together (using the GPS Pathfan accurate position for the point feature.

When the GeoExppositions the logginthe status bar. Theindicates how manthe selected featur

Loggingicon

86

d is already highlighted, so pressta dictionary appears:

highlight Good, then pressattribute in the form.

More...


2. Enter the Condition attribute for the gate. The Condition fielE . A Pop-up list of values that was defined in the da

3. The condition of the gate looks good. Use the arrow keys toE . The GeoExplorer 3 automatically goes to the next

87

meric attribute, so a

is highlighted. Press1 to scrollleft. Press 1 to scroll the

r the Lock ID.

More...


4. To enter the Lock ID number press E. Lock ID is a nuNumeric entry field appears:

The number on the lock is 43. By default, the rightmost cellthe displayed number to 3. Press 2 to move one cell to thedisplayed number to 4. Press E to accept the value fo

88

n needed for the gate.

bottom of the screen to confirm


You have collected all the positions and attribute informatio

5. To close the gate feature press e .

The message Feature stored appears briefly at thethat you have saved the feature.

89

the Later button

S positions.

he Road form appears:

e logging icon to let you know

ne feature, travel along the line.oExplorer 3 will log a GPSured interval set when thein the Data Dictionary Editor.joined together to form a line.

More...


Collecting a line feature using1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Road.

You can record the attributes of the road without logging GP

2. Press4 to highlight the Later button, and press E. T

NOTE When you use the Later button, a pause icon flashes over ththat the GeoExplorer 3 is not logging GPS positions.

In order to record a liAs you do so, the Geposition at the configfeature was createdThese positions are

Pauseicon

90

e the Text entry field to type the

E (at the bottom of the screen)

keys on the GeoExplorer 3ighlight the letter P and then. A “P” appears in the edit barf the screen. Continueopriate letters until you haveword PINE. Use the SPACE

e function bar) to add a spaces in the edit bar. To do this,

CE and press E . ThenROAD.

More...


3. The Name field is already highlighted, so press E. Usname of the road, PINE ROAD:

4. When finished, presse. Alternatively, highlight CLOSand pressE .

Use the arrowhandheld to hpress Enear the top oselecting apprcompleted thefunction (in thbetween wordhighlight SPAenter the word

Edit barFunctionbar

Closebar

91

ified that it was required. So ife, the GeoExplorer 3 warns you

the data dictionary in the officeed to change the value.

ld. A pop-up list appears. From

eature.

the road feature.

essage from the screen,


When you created the Name attribute in the office, you specyou attempt to close the road feature without entering a namthat it is required and will not let you go any further:

5. The speed limit for Pine Road is 10 mph. When you createdyou set 10 mph as the default, so in this case you do not ne

NOTE If you do need to change the value, select the Speed Limit fiethe list select the correct value.

6. Pressl to begin logging GPS positions for the road f

7. When you reach the end of the road, presse to close

To clear an “Error” mpress e .

92

g the Later

have not yet reached the waterle on the way to it.

cet .

n to start recording theture before you actually get to it.

More...


Collecting a point feature usinbuttonThe next feature you are going to collect is a water faucet. Youfaucet, but you can enter the sample test tube and the date whi

1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Water Fau

2. The Later button is already highlighted, so pressE.

Later button

Use the Later buttoattributes for a fea

93

ou set the date to auto-generateit the value by selecting the Date

e GeoExplorer 3 starts loggings.

feature and store it.

Pauseicon

More...


3. The Water Faucet form appears:

NOTE When you use the Later button, a pause iconflashes over the logging icon to let you know thatGeoExplorer 3 is not logging GPS positions.

4. Enter the attributes for the water faucet now, sothat when you arrive at the feature, you can startlogging GPS positions.

5. Select the Test Tube Number field and enter132. For more information, see Numeric entry.

6. The date attribute automatically appears. This is because ywhen you created it in the office. If you need to, you can edfield. A numeric entry field appears.

7. When you reach the water faucet feature, press l. ThGPS positions for this feature and the pause icon disappear

8. Select the ID Number field and enter 15.

9. Record sufficient positions, then press e to close the

94

res. Use these values shown


10. Repeat this procedure to create two more water faucet featubelow for the Test Tube Number and ID Number fields:

95

re.

d this feature in the office, no

rea feature, you travel aroundrea. As you do so, thea GPS position at the

t when the feature was createdEditor. These positions arethe perimeter of the area.

positions are joined together tore is no need to return to the

More...


Collecting an area feature1. From the New feature list, press 5 to highlight Lake featu

2. Press2 to highlight the Now button, and pressE.

The GeoExplorer 3 starts to log positions. When you createattributes were assigned.

In order to record an athe perimeter of the aGeoExplorer 3 will logconfigured interval sein the Data Dictionaryjoined together to form

The first and last GPSclose the area, so thestart point.

96

this, pressd until the Mapn the map, along with the lake

ay look different to the map

an view the map at differents. To do this, press m.t the Zoom in/Zoom out option.

More...


3. You can view the DATA map while collecting features. To dotab is active. The features that you collected are displayed operimeter that you are currently collecting.

NOTE Depending on the scale you are using to view your map, it mshown above.

You cscaleSelec

Current

Currentposition

Feature

PointLine

97

ake and you want to stop andould stop logging positions for

rer 3 stops logging positions andollecting the lake feature, pressrs.

till active and the GeoExplorer 3

sse to close the feature.

ke data collection more efficient.


4. You can pause logging if required.

For example, if you are driving around the perimeter of the lexamine a picnic shelter some distance from the lake, you wthe lake boundary. To do this, pressl . The GeoExploa pause icon flashes over of the logging icon. To continue cl again to resume logging. The pause icon disappea

For more information, see Pause and resume logging.

5. Pressd to go back to the New tab. The Lake form is sis still logging positions for the lake.

6. When you have driven around the perimeter of the lake, pre

TIP There are several advanced techniques that you can use to maFor more information, see Advanced data collection.

98

Explorer 3 handheld. This

ile is closed, and the handheld is

ss e until the File tab


Closing a fileWhen the data collection session is completed, turn off the Geoautomatically closes the data file.

To turn off the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, presso . The data fturned off.

TIP To close the data file that you are using and start a new file, preappears.

99

tatatatae National Park, use the GPSnsfer it to the GIS.

view the data. Topics are:

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial5: Processing the data

5555 Processing the daProcessing the daProcessing the daProcessing the daWhen you return from your data collection session in WaterstonPathfinder Office software to process the data collected and tra

This part of the tutorial shows you how to transfer, process, and

• Transferring data

• Differentially correcting data

• Viewing data

• Exporting data to a GIS

100

xplorer 3 to the office computer.to the office computer is easy.

pport module. Make sure that

athfinder Office software.

Transfer.



xplorer 3 handheld.

iles on the data collector.

More...


Transferring dataYou need to transfer the data collected in the field from the GeoETransferring data from the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system

1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExplorer 3 suthe support module is connected to the office computer.

The GeoExplorer 3 is ready to communicate with the GPS P

2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, select Utilities / Data





4. Select the Receive tab.

5. Click Add and select Data File from the list.

The Open dialog appears. The files shown are the current f

101

ame(s) and click Open.

pear in the Files to Receive list:

fault to the current project folder.

More...


6. Select one or more files to be transferred. Highlight the filen

The Open dialog disappears, and the selected data files ap

The Destination that the files are to be transferred to will de

102

ld.


nt or almanac files.



The data files are transferred to the GeoExplorer 3 handhe



NOTE You can also use the Data Transfer utility to transfer waypoi


103

ing satellite clock andthe error from the data, andcy of the receiver.

Correction utility by selectingrom the GeoExplorer 3 appears

More...


Differentially correcting dataThe data collected by GPS receivers is subject to errors, includatmospheric errors. Differential correction can remove much ofimproves the accuracy of GPS positions to the specified accura

1. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, start the DifferentialUtilities / Differential Correction. The last file(s) transferred fin the Selected Files field.

104

More...


The following dialog appears:

105

ns available: Local Search forult, base files are stored in theed to change the Folder path forou have searched for or selectedars:

More...


2. Specify the location of your base files.

Depending on the source of base files, there are three optiobase files, Internet Search for base files, or Browse. By defacurrent project’s base file folder on your local drive. If you nethe Local Search for base files option, click Browse. Once ythe base files, the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog appe

106

e selected base files provideon dialog appears:

More...


3. Use the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog to make sure thcoverage for the rover files. Click OK. The Reference Positi

4. Click OK to confirm the reference position.

107

current project folder.

lected.

ifferential correction. Click Close


5. Specify the output folder. By default, the output folder is the

6. Select a processing option.

By default, Smart Code and Carrier Phase Processing is se

7. Click OK to differentially correct the selected files.

8. The Differential Completed dialog details the results of the dto close this dialog.

108

you can display, edit, and plot it.field data. Use it to makecan specify the colors, symbols,

asy way to verify the integrity of

n. Select the data file(s) that you:\Pfdata\Geo3 Tutorial).

More...


Viewing dataWhen the data has been transferred and differentially correctedThe GPS Pathfinder Office Map window is the best way to viewgraphical queries and measurements on the collected data. Youand line styles for each feature. The Map window provides an ethe field data.

To view the data:

1. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar, select File / Opewant to view. The current project folder is the default path (C

109

p:

More...


2. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar, select View / Ma

The Map window displays the selected file.

Lake feature

110

lick the feature. The Featurebout the selected feature.

stance between the two points is

dow display, refer to the View

ftware to edit data, you can


3. To display the attributes of any feature on the map, double-cProperties dialog appears. It provides attribute information a

4. Change the color of the Lake feature. Right-clickthe Lake feature on the map. From the shortcutmenu select Lake Layer Style. The Lake styledialog appears. Use this dialog to change the colorof the lake area to blue.

5. You can also measure between positions andfeatures, and compute areas. For example, youcan compute the distance between the Roadfeature and the Lake feature. To do this, selectData / Measure from the GPS Pathfinder Officemenu bar. The cursor becomes a ruler when theMap window is displayed. Click a point on theRoad feature. Then click a point on the Lake feature. The dicomputed and displayed at the bottom of the screen.

For more information about the GPS Pathfinder Office Map winmenu topic in the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

NOTE After using the Map window in the GPS Pathfinder Office soexport the data to your GIS.

111

s .ssf file format files into aort point, line, and area features,other formats.

More...


Exporting data to a GISThe Export utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software convertformat that can be read by a GIS or CAD system. It lets you exp(together with their attributes and GPS positions) to a variety of

112

by selecting Utilities / Export:

the Selected Files field.

in the current project.More...


To export data to a GIS:

1. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software, start the Export utility

By default, the last file(s) differentially corrected appear(s) in

2. Select the output folder. By default, this is the export folder

113

rmat.

rt. Click Close to close this

now open it in your GIS.

, such as transfer, differentialcome back from the field,

r 3 support module. TheGeoExplorer 3 is in thetch Processor to meet your

Pathfinder Office Help.


3. Select the Export setup.

4. Click OK to export the selected file(s) to the specified GIS fo

5. The Export Completed dialog details the results of the expodialog.

6. The file is now in the format required by your GIS. You can

NOTE You can increase productivity by automating repetitive taskscorrection, and export, using the Batch Processor. When yousimply place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the GeoExploreConnection Manager utility automatically recognizes that thesupport module and runs the Batch Processor. Set up the Badata requirements.

For more information about batch processing, refer to the GPS

114

tetetetethe GeoExplorer 3c edition.

faucets in Waterstone NationalExplorer 3 data collection systemnd the Waterstone datae faucets. This part of the tutorialreparing to take thefield to update data. Topics are:

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial6: Preparing for update

6666 Preparing for updaPreparing for updaPreparing for updaPreparing for updaNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with

A month has passed and it is necessary to re-sample the waterPark. A different Park Ranger is going to be doing this. The Geoand a real-time source will be used to navigate to each faucet, adictionary will be used to verify and update the attributes for thosgives step-by-step instructions that should be performed when pGeoExplorer 3 and the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver into the

• Using real-time differential corrections

• Checking the memory

• Deleting files

• Locking the configuration and tasks

• Transferring GIS data

• Checking the equipment before going into the field

115

al

atures and waypoints using thes you can accurately navigate to

eal-time source to receive RTCMlorer 3 then applies thehis gives greater accuracy and

ed to use RTCM. If necessary,(in the field) or the Configuration

can use an alternative source


Using real-time differenticorrectionsTo update existing data, back in the field, you can navigate to feRoad, Compass, or Chart tabs. Using RTCM real-time correctionany specific location.

In this tutorial, you use the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver rand transmit the information to the GeoExplorer 3. The GeoExpdifferential corrections to GPS positions computed in the field. Tsaves postprocessing time in the office.

By default, the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is configuryou can change the Real-time settings using the GeoExplorer 3Manager (in the office).

NOTE If you do not have the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver, youof real-time differential corrections.

116

S data in the field, transfer thesethe memory level to make suremake space for the GIS data.

e Status bar.

his case there is not muchaining memory. For this project,need to delete some files to

ate space before transferring thefiles. See Deleting files.


Checking the memoryBefore using the GeoExplorer 3 to verify and update existing GIdata files. Before transferring them to the GeoExplorer 3, checkthat sufficient space is available. If necessary, delete old files to

To check the memory levels using the Status tab:

1. Press o to turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

2. Presss until the Status tab is active:

NOTE When the memory level is low, the memory icon flashes in th

Memory gauge

In tremyoucreGIS

Memory icon

117

n system so that you can transferds on the project.

the File tab is not displayed.

t appears:

displays information about thee list and shows the free spacer 3 data collection system.

More...


Deleting filesDeleting files creates space on the GeoExplorer 3 data collectiodata and collect new data. The amount of space required depen

To delete files:

1. Pressd . The File tab appears.

NOTE If a file is currently open, press e to close it. Otherwise

2. Pressm and select Delete file(s). The Delete file(s) lis

The message boxhighlighted file in thon the GeoExplore

Messagebox

118

lete and pressE . You are

computer, the Please confirmsferred to the PC:o to cancel the deletion.


3. Use the Delete file(s) list to select the file that you want to deprompted to confirm deletion. Select Yes to delete the file:

4. Presse to close the Delete file(s) list.

NOTE If the selected data file has not been transferred to the officemessage appears: File ‘x’ has not been tranDelete anyway?. Select Yes to delete the file. Select N

119

n and tasksrotect it to make sure that it is notets your specifications. You can

changed in the field. Use theare to apply a password to the

les personally. A member of your3 data collection system so that

/ Other / Configuration Manager.

log any GPS data betweenock this field so that no GPS data

More...


Locking the configuratioWhen you set up a configuration in the office, you may want to pchanged in the field. This makes sure that the data collected mealso protect certain tasks to prevent files from being deleted orConfiguration Manager utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office softwconfiguration and specific tasks.

This month you will be unable to go and collect the water sampfield crew will be collecting them. You can lock the GeoExplorerdata files cannot be deleted. To do this:

1. Start the Configuration Manager utility by selecting Utilities

2. Select File / New. A configuration dialog appears.

3. In the Configuration field, type Waterstone 1.

4. Make sure the Data tab is selected.

5. Highlight the Log between features field. You do not need tofeatures because such data is not required for this project. Lis collected unless a feature is being recorded.

120

dialog). This locks the Log

More...


6. Select the Password locked check box (at the bottom of thebetween features field.

121

pears.

rd in the Password field:

More...


7. Click Password Settings. The Password Settings dialog ap

8. Select the Data files: Delete check box and type the passwo

122

(s).

eoExplorer 3 once in the field.

nfiguration file to the same folderutorial).

ettings to be changed. If you, lock it by applying a password.


9. Click OK to accept the password and lock the selected task

NOTE You will need this password to delete any data files on the G

10. Save the new Waterstone configuration. You can add the coas the data dictionary files. (For example, C:\Pfdata\Geo3 T

11. Select File / Exit to close the Configuration Manager utility.


TIP Locking and unlocking is useful when you do not want certain screate a configuration for a certain job and do not want it altered

123

e required information from thethfinder Office software, use the

f file format required by theransfer data between the office

GeoExplorer 3 data collection

More...


Transferring GIS dataBefore going into the field for a data update session, transfer thGIS to the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. In the GPS PaImport utility to convert data from a GIS data format into the .ssGeoExplorer 3. Then use the Data Transfer utility to efficiently tcomputer and the GeoExplorer 3.

This part of the tutorial outlines how to transfer GIS data to thesystem.

124

u bar, select Utilities / Other /

More...


To convert GIS data to SSF format:

1. Start the Import utility. From the GPS Pathfinder Office menImport:

125

th specified for the output file is

p.

ies to make changes.


2. Click Browse and select the input file(s). By default, the pathe current project folder.

3. In the Choose an Import Setup group, select an import setu

4. Make sure that all import settings are correct. Click Propert

5. Click Browse to change the output folder or filename.

6. Click OK to import the file(s).


126

xplorer 3 data

the GeoExplorer 3c edition.

r Office software, use the Datareated in Locking the

the GeoExplorer 3, thehe file.

More...


Transferring files to the GeoEcollection system

NOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with

Once the data from the GIS is imported into the GPS PathfindeTransfer utility to transfer it, and the configuration file that you cconfiguration and tasks, to the GeoExplorer 3.

NOTE When you transfer a data file from GPS Pathfinder Office toassociated data dictionary is automatically transferred with t

127

ce menu bar, select Utilities /



xplorer 3 handheld.

m the list. The Open dialog

ghlight it and click Open.

ct Configuration File from the list.

efault, this is the last folder that

More...


To transfer files to the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system:

1. Start the Data Transfer utility. From the GPS Pathfinder OffiData Transfer.






4. First, select the data file. Click Add and select Data File froappears.

5. The data file that you imported appears in the list of files. Hi

6. Now select the configuration file to send. Click Add and seleThe Open dialog appears.

7. Select the folder where the configuration file is located. By dwas used to transfer a configuration file.

128

nd click Open.

tion file appear in the Files to

More...


8. The configuration file appears in the list of files. Highlight it a

The Open dialog disappears, and the data file and configuraSend list:

129

oExplorer 3 handheld.




The data file and configuration file are transferred to the Ge



130

before

quipment and that it is working

n in the support module. You canthe handheld out of the support

e GeoExplorer 3 is on, use the

ve the BoB receiver or the cableif necessary.


Checking the equipmentgoing into the fieldBefore going into the field, check that you have the necessary ecorrectly.

For the previous tasks the GeoExplorer 3 data collector has beecheck if the internal power source is fully charged without takingmodule. If the GeoExplorer 3 is off, use the Standby mode. If thStatus bar.

Check that the real-time source is fully charged, and that you hato connect the real-time source to the GeoExplorer 3 handheld,

131


llect the monthly water samples.GeoExplorer 3 data collectionre are some tasks that you needime source to navigate back to

dating existing GIS data, using

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Tutorial7: Back in the field

7777 Back in the fieldBack in the fieldBack in the fieldBack in the fieldNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with

Your supervisor has sent you to Waterstone National Park to coThe configuration and data files have been transferred onto thesystem for you, but before starting the data update session, theto complete. You can then use the GeoExplorer 3 and the real-tthe water faucets and update the attributes.

This part of the tutorial contains step-by-step instructions for upreal-time corrections, and navigating. Topics are:

• Initial tasks

• Navigating to and updating features

• Creating a waypoint

• Closing the file

132

llowing tasks:


Initial tasksBefore starting a real-time data update session, complete the fo

• Checking the GPS status

• Configuring the GPS slider bar

• Checking the real-time status

133

d geometry, in order to computeollection system, it automaticallyn. Use the satellite icon in the

positions. If the satellite icon anduting GPS positions.

ailable to compute GPSore favorable.


Checking the GPS statusThe GeoExplorer 3 needs a minimum of four satellites, with gooa 3D GPS position. When you turn on the GeoExplorer 3 data cstarts to track visible satellites and to calculate its current positioStatus bar to check if the GeoExplorer 3 is computing satellitethe number below it are not flashing, the GeoExplorer 3 is comp

If the satellite geometry is poor, or there are too few satellites avpositions, adjust the GPS slider bar or wait until conditions are m

134

rction system that you shouldand logging intervals). Configurether (non-critical) settings to suit

ar to best suit the environment of

ironment has several areasou need to adjust the GPS sliderns to be recorded. Some of theositions ensures that there are

More...


Configuring the GPS slider baThere are some critical settings in the GeoExplorer 3 data colleconfigure before collecting data (for example, the GPS settingsthese before leaving the office, or in the field. You can also set oyour application or preferences.

The following steps show you how to configure the GPS slider bWaterstone National Park.

Waterstone National Park is mostly forest area. This type of envwhere the tree canopy obstructs the view of the sky. Therefore, ybar from the default middle position to Low to allow more positiopositions recorded may have lower quality, but recording more pfewer gaps in the data collected.

135

guration screen appears.

More...


To configure the GPS slider bar:

1. Presss until the Setup tab is active.

2. Highlight Configurations and press E . The Edit confi

136

you collect more positions, butin a forest area where trees cansults. If the slider bar is set toonough positions will be collected

Configuration Manager utility,

h setting on the GPS slider bara project requires the highestecision.


3. Select the GPS button. The GPS slider bar appears:

4. Press2 to lower the GPS slider bar four notches. This letssome may be less precise. Because you are collecting datablock your view of the sky, this may provide better overall rehigh, the precision of the positions collected is high, but not eto map the entire park. For more information, see GPS.

NOTE To adjust the GPS slider bar using the GPS Pathfinder Officerefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

TIP Use a higwheneverlevel of pr

137

eal-time corrections, alwaysse the Status tab to view the

GeoExplorer 3 data collectionGeoExplorer 3 is computing

ears. This icon flashes if thereno GPS position.

his screen to check that thexplorer 3 is receiving corrections

the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB)er. When the GeoExplorer 3 ising differential corrections, the

ime position icon appears. Thisndicates the type of RTCMe. For this tutorial, theon-on-a-Belt (BoB) icon appears.


Checking the real-time statusWhen using the Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver to provide rcheck the real-time status before recording data or navigating. Ureal-time status.

Press s until The Status tab is active.

NOTE You can also use the Status bar on the right to check that thesystem is computing real-time corrected positions. When thereal-time corrected positions, the real-time position icon appis a problem with the real-time source connection, or there is

Real-timeinformation

Use tGeoEfromreceivreceivreal-ticon isourcBeac

Real-timeicon

138

ng featureseatures recorded previously. Theo navigate—a road, a compass,r personal preference.

ot know where they are. Use thenavigate to them.

this section the following tasks


Navigating to and updatiWhen updating GIS data, use The NAV section to navigate to fGeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides three methods tand a chart view. Select the method that suits your application o

You did not record the original water faucet features, so you do nGeoExplorer 3 data collection system and a real-time source to

There are different ways to select a feature and navigate to it. Inare explained:

• Opening a data file

• Using the Search function

• Updating the data

• Navigating to a target using the Chart tab

• Navigating to a target using the Road tab

139

ins the GIS data. Use the File tab

lly selected in the File field as

More...


Opening a data fileBefore starting the data update session, open the file that contato do this.

To open an existing file:

1. Pressd . The File tab appears.

2. Press4 to highlight Open selected file.

The data file that you transferred from the GIS is automaticathis was the last data file transferred to the GeoExplorer 3.

140

list appears:

e features to update them.


3. PressE to open the selected file. The Update feature

You have opened a data file, so you can now navigate to th

141

ich feature you need to visit

list.

More...


Using the Search functionWhen you have many features to select from, and you know whbased on an attribute value, you can search for it.

To search for a target:

1. Pressm to display the options for the Update feature

2. Press5 and highlight Search.

3. PressE to display the Search form:

142

.

need to search for a particular

s E.

earch form:

ucet.

sufficient for what you need.

More...


4. Press5 to highlight the Feature Type field and press EYou will see a list of the features in your data dictionary. Youwater faucet.

5. Press the5 arrow key to highlight Water Faucet and pres

You can now see the Attribute field has been added to the S

6. PressE to display the list of attributes for the water fa

7. Press5 to highlight ID Number and press E.

The Operator field can be changed, but the value Equals is

8. Press5 to highlight Attribute Value and pressE.

143

ter faucet:

ow all you need to do is set this

More...


9. Type 15 as the attribute value number and press e.

The value 15 is now shown as the Attribute Value for the wa

10. Presse to carry out the search.

Water Faucet 15 is highlighted on the Update feature list. Nfeature as the target.

11. Pressm and highlight Set Target.

144

g symbol appears beside the

More...


12. PressE.

You have selected a feature to navigate to. The crossed-flafeature to confirm that you have set it as the target:

13. Pressn until the Chart tab is active.

145

he arrow represents the directionlay the date, time, and current

ter faucet and take a water


Here the crossed-flag symbol represents the water faucet, and tin which you are moving. The Info windows at the bottom dispcoordinates.

You can use the information on the screen to navigate to the wasample.

146

ata update tab to update the

faucet is still highlighted,the target.

More...


Updating the dataNow that you have navigated to the water faucet, return to the Dattributes.

To update a feature:

1. Pressd. The Update feature list appears:

Notice that the waterbecause you set it as

147

ure.

fy that you are updating theID number of the feature you

Test Tube Number attribute. A

The number on this month’s test


2. PressE to display the attribute entry form for this feat

3. The first attribute is the ID Number. Use this attribute to vericorrect water faucet. The number on the faucet matches thehave opened on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, so select theNumeric entry field appears.

4. Use the Numeric entry field to enter the test tube number.tube is 234, so enter this into the field.

5. The Date is automatically updated by the GeoExplorer 3data collection system. Presse to save the attributechanges and return to the Update feature list.

Notice that a tick appears in the check box to show that thewater faucet has been updated. For more information, seeUpdating attribute values.

NOTE A check box appears next to the features in the Updatefeature list for files transferred from the GPS PathfinderOffice software. When a feature is updated, a ✓ appears inthe check box.

148

e Chart tabart view. This is another way of

eys to move the cursor towardsbel appears with the attribute

d Test Tube number—to help you

More...


Navigating to a target using thYou can also select the features you want to update from the chmaking sure that you are navigating to the correct feature.

1. Pressn until the Chart tab is active.

2. To activate the cursor, press any arrow key. Use the arrow kthe closest feature. When the cursor is over the feature, a lainformation that you defined in the office—the ID number anidentify the correct faucet.

149

key.

t.

e selected target.

for the first water faucet that you


3. With the water faucet feature highlighted, press the EThe Select target screen is displayed:

4. PressE to accept the highlighted feature as the targe

5. Use the information displayed on the chart to navigate to th

6. When you reach the target, update its attributes as you didrevisited. For more information, see Updating the data.

150

e Road tabd direction, to assist you when

ou may not be able to drive

her water faucet to navigate to.

ted water faucet feature.

More...


Navigating to a target using thThe Road tab provides useful information, such as distance annavigating to a target, especially when traveling in a vehicle.

WARNING The Road tab displays a straight line bearing to the target. Ydirectly to a target using this tab as a source of direction.

To navigate to a feature using the Road tab:

1. Pressn until the The Road tab is active.

2. From the Option list, choose Select Target and choose anot

The road on the screen moves as you navigate to the selec

151

animation of the road to navigate

symbol. The direction you aream above, the Road signnd Distance info windows tosymbol until the distance is zero.ases.

the screen. When you are offcreen. The angle (clockwise orow far off course you are.

t

rline

indows

More...


3. Use the information displayed in the Info windows and theto the target.

The Road screen displays your current position as a personmoving is always towards the top of the screen. In the diagrindicates that the target is front of you. Use the Road sign aguide you to the target. You need to move toward the targetAs you move closer to the target, the width of the road incre

When you are on course, the road is displayed vertically oncourse, the road is displayed skewed (at an angle) on the scounterclockwise) at which the road is turned depends on h

Targe

Cente

Info w

Your currentposition

Target name

152

loser to the target, the Distanceion, see Using the Road tab.

u did for the first water faucetdata.

oad sign, and Velocity. You canpreference.


As you follow the directions in the Info windows and move cdecreases and the road width increases. For more informat

4. When you reach the water faucet, update its attributes as yothat you revisited. For more information, see Updating the

TIP By default, the Info windows on the Road tab show Distance, Rconfigure the Info windows to suit your application or personal

153

allen tree. Mark it as a waypoint,

handheld (in the field) or usingic point of interest that is not part

s recorded for a waypoint andrily used for navigation, and canate waypoint file.

e. You can use the Option list to

More...


Creating a waypointWhile in the field collecting water samples, you come across a fso that the field crew can navigate back to it and clear the path.

A waypoint is a single position created using the GeoExplorer 3the GPS Pathfinder Office software. Use it to record a geographof your data file.

A waypoint is different from a feature. No attribute information ithe GPS position is not linked to a data file. Waypoints are primabe transferred to the GPS Pathfinder Office software as a separ

A waypoint has a number, name, latitude, longitude, and altitudcreate and edit waypoints.

154

More...


To create a waypoint at your current location:

1. Pressm . The option list appears:

2. Select New waypoint.3. The GeoExplorer 3 automatically names the new

waypoint. The Name field is already highlighted, so pressE to change the name. Use the Text entry field toclear the default name and enter TREE as the new namefor the waypoint.

NOTE If the cursor is active, the waypoint is automatically giventhe default name, “CursorXXX”.

155

position as the position of the

r Office software. For more


4. The GeoExplorer 3 automatically assigns your current GPSwaypoint. Press e .

TIP Waypoints can be created in the office using the GPS Pathfindeinformation, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

156

e GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

e GeoExplorer 3 handheld.


Closing the fileWhen you have completed your data update session, turn off th

To do this, press o. This closes the data file and turns off th

IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions 157

III: III: III: III: ADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSADVANCED FUNCTIONSWhen using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system to collect and update data, you can use avariety of advanced functions to provide more accurate and efficient results. The following topicsare discussed here:

• Advanced data collection

• Carrier phase data collection

• Coordinate systems

158

llectionllectionllectionllectiones for efficient data collection.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions8: Advanced data collection

8888 Advanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data coAdvanced data collection techniques offer time-saving techniquStep-by-step instructions are provided for:

• Advanced datalogging options

• Recording positions only

• Continuing line and area features

• Segmenting line features

• Offsets

• Averaged vertices

• Repeating features

159

ptions-related options for logging GPS

relative to the start of a feature.

ure.

re.

er.


Advanced datalogging oThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system provides three closelydata. These options differ in their timing of GPS data collection

• Before – start collecting GPS positions before starting a feat

• Now – simultaneously collect GPS positions and start a featu

• Later – start a feature, then start collecting GPS positions lat

160

ntains a large number of featuremust scroll through the list to findfeature. The GPS positionsure that you select. This meansropriate feature type.

lect the start and end of linef a bridge, press l to startress l to pause logging.

e, and enter the attributes. Presscorded before starting the

More...


BeforeThis option is useful when you are using a data dictionary that cotypes. For example, if a data dictionary has 50 features and youthe feature to record, you can start logging and then select thecollected and stored are automatically assigned to the next featthat you can collect extra GPS data while searching for the app

You can also use the Before option to quickly and efficiently colfeatures. For example, if you are driving and come to the start ologging GPS positions. When you reach the end of the bridge, pThen scroll through the feature list, select the bridge feature type to close the feature and assign all GPS data that you refeature.

161

he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionears in the Status bar.

inimum configured loggingal, select Edit feature settings.

Before option, select the feature

l to stop logging if no


To use the Before option:

1. Pressd until The New tab is active. Pressl . Tsystem starts to log GPS positions and the logging icon app

NOTE When using the Before option, the logging interval used is the minterval (for all features). To change the minimum logging interv

2. To assign the GPS positions to a feature collected using thefrom the New feature list. The attribute entry form appears.

3. Presse to stop logging and store the feature. (Pressfeature is selected.)

Logging icon

New feature list

162

ollection system is recorded intinuously. If you do not want toollecting feature and attributeall features. To change this

ere you do not need to recordant to record a breadcrumb trail

t feature or attribute information,

ionary. The data dictionary


Recording positions onlyMost of the GPS data you collect with the GeoExplorer 3 data cfiles rather than as waypoints. A file lets you store positions conuse a data dictionary, you can collect positions in a file without cdata. Positions are recorded at the minimum logging interval forinterval, select Edit feature settings.

Recording just GPS positions is a useful technique in cases whfeature and attribute data. A utility company, for example, may wof the day’s activities. In this case, you would not want to colleconly the positions.

To record GPS positions only:

1. Create a new file using The File tab.

NOTE The Dictionary field must have a value. Use the Generic dictselected does not matter as it will not be used.

2. Pressl to start logging GPS positions.

3. Pressl to pause logging GPS positions.

4. Presse to stop logging.

163

featurespoint feature that you need to

it may be some distance away.counter a gate (point feature).rd the gate. Simply end the path

on to continue the path feature

ting.

s you want. The number is.

cting . The New feature list

e entry form appears and logging

logged sufficient GPS positions,ears again.

More...


Continuing line and areaWhen recording a line or area feature, you might come across arecord. The point feature may be along the line/area feature, orWhen collecting a path (line feature), for example, you might enYou do not have to record the entire path and then return to recofeature, collect the gate feature, and then use the Continue optiyou were collecting.

NOTE Other Trimble GIS products refer to this functionality as Nes

NOTE You can collect as many point features within a line or area alimited only by storage space in the GeoExplorer 3 handheld

To use Continue:

1. Presse to close the line or area feature you are colleappears.

2. Select the point feature that you want to collect. The attributstarts.

3. When you have recorded attributes for the point feature andpress e to store the feature. The New feature list app

164

rea feature name>. Theor area feature that you were

eature.

r, press e to store the


4. Pressm. From the option list, select Continue <line/aGeoExplorer 3 returns to the attribute entry form for the linelogging before and continues to log GPS positions for that f

5. When you complete the traverse of the line or area perimetefeature.

165

ne into a number of segments.values for parts of the same

y start another of the same type,s where it is difficult (or illegal) to

ment.

f the same type is immediatelyThe last GPS position of the firstature, so that adjacent segments

attributes of the first linegment to store one feature and

More...


Segmenting line featuresWhen collecting line features, it is often convenient to divide a liSegmenting line features allows you to specify different attributephysical line. You can also end one line feature and immediatelwhile still moving. This is useful when mapping roads or highwaystop at the point where one feature ends and the next starts.

To segment a line feature:

1. Start collecting the line feature.

2. From the attribute entry form, press m and select Seg

The current line feature is stored and another line feature ostarted with the same attribute values as the previous one.feature is identical to the first GPS position of the second fejoin end-to-end in the GIS.

NOTE When you select Segment, the GeoExplorer 3 validates thefeature. Always complete attribute entry before selecting Sestart another.

166

ble (because of poor satelliteith the last GPS position of them the first GPS position thatsegments.


CAUTION If you select Segment and no current GPS position is availageometry, for example), the GeoExplorer 3 does not start wprevious line feature. Instead, the new line feature starts frobecomes available. In this case, a gap occurs between the

167

n enter an offset and record it atple, it is typically easier to standd record its attributes. This

assess its condition. Specify anositioned correctly in the GIS.

on. Select Offset to view or enterconfiguring constant offsets, see

More...


OffsetsIf you cannot travel alongside or over the top of a feature, you cathe specified distance. When collecting a tree feature, for examsome distance (such as 10 paces to the North) from the tree anensures good GPS reception, and lets you see the tree clearly tooffset to the tree of “10 m South”. This ensures that the tree is pThis is an example of an offset point feature.

The attribute entry form for each feature type has an Offset optithe offset for the feature being collected. For information aboutFeature settings.

168

, when collecting a line featurethe fence and record therea feature such as a lake, youimeter using an offset. These

ociated with it. This means thate offset during the line feature,

e feature has its own offset. Toust apply to the whole area

e sure that you can remain a

More...


You can also use offsets for line and area features. For examplesuch as a fence, it may be easier to drive along the road besidepositions of the fence as an offset feature. When collecting an acould walk some distance from the lake edge and record its perexamples are shown below:

NOTE Any feature (point, line, or area) can have only one offset assto record a line feature with a given offset and then change thyou must segment the line at that point. Each segmented lincollect an area feature using offsets, the same offset value mfeature. This may require a test run around an object to makconsistent distance from it.

Area offsetdistance

Line offsetdistance

Path traveledaround lake

169

et. An Offset form appears:

a entry field to enter the value.

ute entry form reappears.

d sufficient GPS positions, press

pen and select Reset.

at appear in the Offset formhe type of feature you areoint, line, or area). Thisws the fields for a line or areaa point feature the fields are:z. distance, and Vert. distance.


To offset a feature:

1. Start the feature.

2. From the attribute entry form, press m and select Offs

3. Enter a value for each field. Select the field and use the dat

4. When the Offset form is complete press e . The attrib

5. When you have recorded attributes for the feature and loggee to store the feature. The New feature list appears.

NOTE To remove an offset, press m while the Offset form is o

The fields thdepend on tcollecting (pexample shofeature. ForBearing, Hor

170

re, you can use the averagedn a line or area feature that arecord a baseball diamond, rather, you can collect an averagedaveraged vertex position, and so

both normal positions andseful when a road or park, for

and displayed as, a singlen view and edit the individualoftware. For more information,

the line or area feature has bothitions and then record averaged

More...


Averaged verticesTo record positions with greater accuracy for a line or area featuvertex function. An averaged vertex is a group of positions withiaveraged and displayed as a single position. For example, to rethan walking round the entire area logging continuous positionsvertex position at home base, move to first base, collect anotheron until you have logged all the bases around the diamond.

With the GeoExplorer 3 you also have the flexibility of collectingaveraged vertex positions within a line or area feature. This is uexample, is made up of both straight and curved parts.

Once collected and saved, an averaged vertex is converted to,position. It is also exported as a single position, although you capositions that make up the vertex in the GPS Pathfinder Office srefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

You can record an averaged vertex at any time. For example, ifcurved and straight parts, you can begin logging continuous posvertices, or vice versa. Both methods are described below.

171

ng begins immediately ined vertices, are recorded.)

e New tab.

with Step 2.

x:

mediately.

More...


To log a feature starting with an averaged vertex:

1. Select Later as the logging mode. (If Now is selected, loggicontinuous mode, and normal positions, rather than averag

1. Start the area or line feature from the New feature list on Th

2. Pressm and follow the instructions below, beginning

To continue logging a feature but record an averaged verte

1. In The New tab, press m.

2. Select New vertex from the list and press E.

A Vertex form for the feature appears, and logging starts im

172

rtex open and Remain

the feature form.

ge is displayed. For eachsteps above.

s logged for the vertex are

of positions recorded for thex is shown in the status bar,gging averaged vertex icon

on


While an averaged vertex is being logged, the messages Vestationary are displayed.

3. Presse to accept and save the vertex, and return to

When the vertex is saved, the Vertex stored messaaveraged vertex you want to record, repeat the appropriate

TIP Press fe to abandon the current vertex. The positionabandoned but any attribute information is retained.

The numbercurrent verteabove the lo( ).

Logging averaged vertex ic

173

atures because you do not haveute value is correct for thed.

recorded feature of that type.overwritten by repeated values.

epeat and pressE.ption list.

appears. The attribute valuese. Edit them if necessary. Press

e Repeat mode.

ppears.

ermined by the data dictionary.te belonging to a feature where


Repeating featuresUsing Repeat lets you efficiently record a sequence of similar feto re-enter values for all attributes. Simply check that each attribselected feature and change only those that need to be change

When you use Repeat, attribute values are copied from the lastAny default attribute values specified in the data dictionary are

To Repeat attributes for similar features:

1. When the New feature list is active, pressm, select RA ✓ appears in the check box. Press e to close the o

2. Select a feature from the New feature list. The attribute formthat appear are those of the last recorded feature of that type to save the attribute values and store the feature.

3. Select another feature. Continue until you want to turn off th

To turn off the Repeat mode:

• Pressm, select Repeat and pressE. The ✓ disa

NOTE When Repeat is not selected, default attribute values are detThe data dictionary specifies a default value for each attribuappropriate.

174

n

collectioncollectioncollectioncollectiona, configure the GeoExplorer 3

n describe in detail how to collect

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions9: Carrier phase data collectio

9999 Carrier phase data Carrier phase data Carrier phase data Carrier phase data To collect a feature with a precision better than regular GPS datdata collection system to log carrier phase data.

The following topics introduce you to the basic concepts and theand use carrier phase data.

• Before you begin

• Configuring the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system

• In the field

• Back in the office

175

n

ith using carrier phase data.


Before you beginThe following topics discuss some of the concepts associated w

• Why use carrier phase data?

• Planning

• Collecting sufficient data

• Time

• Recording features

• Postprocessing

176

n

dent GPS positions. If enoughg reliable positions.

collected in the field can beyou are back at the office.llite, the positions generatedthe field.

arrier phase data, so avoide of day when you can expect tometry.

in the field.


Why use carrier phase data?In a conventional GPS session, the GeoExplorer 3 logs indepensatellites are visible and the geometry is good, it continues to lo

When the GeoExplorer 3 also logs carrier phase data, positionsfurther postprocessed to generate more precise positions onceBecause measurements are collected from each individual sateduring postprocessing are more precise than positions logged in

PlanningYou require a clear view of the sky at all times when collecting cobstacles such as trees, bridges, and tall buildings. Choose a timtrack a maximum number of satellites with the best possible geo

NOTE Always make sure that you collect sufficient useful data while

177

n

enough time to provide sufficient

recision, the GeoExplorer 3 datafor the required minimum time.fore the postprocessing softwaresatellites together provide these more.

ops below four.

during a session, you greatly

More...


Collecting sufficient dataAlways make sure that at least four satellites remain visible foruseful data for postprocessing.

Number of satellitesTo provide sufficient carrier phase data to achieve the required pcollection system needs to log data from at least four satellitesHowever, you will need to log data from at least five satellites becan compute the precision of the generated positions. The fivenecessary redundancy for the precision required, but you can u

“Loss of lock” occurs when the number of available satellites dr

NOTE If you minimize the number of times that loss of lock occursincrease the precision of the postprocessed results.

178

n

, the GeoExplorer 3 datas four or more satellites ared, all of the carrier phase data.


When you start a file that has any features configured to carriercollection system starts to record carrier phase data. As soon aavailable, a counter starts. When the minimum time has elapserecorded during that period can be used during postprocessing

179

n

ilable is 10 minutes. Thethan 10 minutes in length.

as soon as four or more

played in the message box. It.

llected until then may not providecounter is automatically reset to

ined.

rrier phase data from four orlapsed since the beginning of


TimeThe minimum time for which four or more satellites must be avaDifferential correction software will not process data blocks less

CounterA counter in the GeoExplorer 3 handheld starts to measure timesatellites are available.

When the counter reaches the minimum time, a message is disindicates that the current “block” contains sufficient useful data

If you lose lock before the end of the minimum time, the data cothe required precision during postprocessing. Consequently, thezero when loss of lock occurs. It only restarts when lock is rega

NOTE The counter is active only if the GeoExplorer 3 is logging camore satellites—it does not simply record the time that has ethe file.

180

n

ends on a combination of the, and the period of time for whichgenerally gives more precise

re shows the relationshipnd the precision of the positions


Time and precisionThe precision of positions generated during postprocessing depnumber of satellites used, the distance between base and roverdata is recorded from those satellites. Collecting data for longerpositions.

Assuming that enough satellites are available, the following figubetween the time taken to collect carrier phase measurements agenerated during postprocessing.

Time

Erro

r

longer baseline

short baseline

181

n

, the GeoExplorer 3 handheldstored as one continuous

er of available satellites. As soonis block continues until lock is

ut the file. These blocks together

of each other, so carrier phase

eed to collect sufficient datafile or reopen an existing one.

More...


What is a “block” of data?When you start a file that has any features configured to carrierstarts to record carrier phase measurements. Useful data is notstream, however, but as a series of “blocks”.

The beginning and end of each block is determined by the numbas four (or more) satellites are available, a new block begins. Thlost. When lock is regained, a new block begins.

The GeoExplorer 3 continues to create blocks of data throughoconstitute the measurement data for the entire session.

Opening and reopening filesThe files that you create in the GeoExplorer 3 are independentdata collected in one file is of no use to another.

If you use the GeoExplorer 3 to collect carrier phase data, you nevery time you open a file—this is true whether you open a newAlways make sure that you collect sufficient data for each file.

182

n

blocks of carrier phase data as

A = 4 or more satellites –useful carrier phase data

B = lock is lost –unusable carrier phasedata

C = lock is regained (4 ormore satellites) –useful carrier phase data

D = lock is again lost –unusable carrier phasedata

More...


The figure below shows how the GeoExplorer 3 creates distinctthe number of satellites changes.

Time in minutes

Num

bero

fsat

ellit

es

5

4

3

2

1

5 10 15 5020 25 30 40 4535

6

7

8

BLOCK BLOCK

A

B C

D

183

n

at 35 minutes when lock is lostum time required for thessfully is 10 minutes, so the firstin time, the greater the precision

not met. The counter does notot used.

creates a new block and thee, this happens 38 minutes afterer 7 minutes worth of data hasthis block does not contain


In the previous figure, the counter begins at time zero and stops(B). This creates the first block of carrier phase data. The minimdifferential correction utility to process carrier phase data succeblock contains sufficient useful data. The longer the blocks areachieved.

Between B and C, the required minimum number of satellites isstart, and the carrier phase data collected during this period is n

When four satellites are again available (C), the GeoExplorer 3counter begins to measure again from time zero. In this examplthe start of the session. Lock is lost again at 45 minutes (D), aftbeen collected. Since the required minimum time is 10 minutes,sufficient continuous data.

184

n

phase measurements in thelines, or areas.

Look for obstructions (such aslock or sufficient satellites.

atellites are available. OnceeoExplorer 3 counter starts.

e is reachedand stay where you are until the, you can move to the nextfficient data to generate precise

ove to the next feature before

More...


Recording featuresWhile the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system collects carrierbackground, you start to record features—these can be points,

Decide carefully when to start and stop recording feature data.trees) that may affect the ability of the GPS receiver to maintain

Before starting the first feature in a file, wait until four or more scarrier phase data from at least four satellites is received, the G

Ending a feature before minimum timOnce the counter is running, you can choose to end the featureminimum time is up. When the minimum carrier time is achievedfeature. Using this method, you can make sure that you have supositions.

Alternatively, if you think you are unlikely to lose lock, you can msufficient carrier phase data is collected.

185

n

u can generate precise positions

carrier phase data stored at the

eature A was started after the, but during postprocessing it

ul data was recorded. You

e

C

BLOCK 3

More...


As long as a block eventually contains sufficient useful data, yofor any feature that falls within it.

This figure shows how individual features benefit from blocks oftime they were recorded.

In this example, Block 1 contains sufficient carrier phase data. Fcounter started for Block 1 and ended before the success beepderives the full benefit of all data recorded for Block 1.

Feature B was unwisely recorded during a period when no usefprobably need to record this feature again.

Blocks of carrier phase data

Individual features logged during this tim

BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2

A B

186

n

ging to this feature continuedloss of lock and a new block ofnimum carrier time was achievedortion of the feature collected) should achieve the desired

with Block 3 may not achieve the

if loss of lock is unlikely.

y should be high rather than low

ou move

cate how useful the current datayou can measure that feature

data, recapture any features that


Feature C was started when the counter started for Block 2. Logafter the minimum carrier time was achieved. Then there was acarrier phase data started. The feature was ended before the mifor this block of data, and the file was closed. In this case, the pbefore the loss of lock occurred (indicated by the end of Block 2precision. However, the second portion of the data, associateddesired precision.

CAUTION Move to the next feature before the minimum time is up only

As you record features, be aware of the following:

• the number of satellites available

• the position of these satellites—if they are to stay visible, theon the horizon

• any obstruction likely to cut off your view of the satellites as y

Read any messages that appear in the message box. They indiis. The message box also shows if loss of lock has occurred, soagain if necessary. If it is clear that a block contains insufficientare affected before leaving the site.

187

n

ential Correction utility of the

ion system also logs code phase

the carrier phase data tostores these results over the toph the arrangement of the new

nerated positions. This helps you


PostprocessingPostprocess all data using an office computer running the DifferGPS Pathfinder Office software.

In addition to carrier phase data, the GeoExplorer 3 data collectdata in the field.

During postprocessing, the Differential Correction software usesgenerate positions of high precision. It computes positions, andof the code phase data. The code phase data simply assists witpositions.

Finally, the software computes the estimated precision of the geto evaluate the GPS results.

188

n

orer 3 data

rer 3 data collection system as

e data collection.

ears.

More...


Configuring the GeoExplcollection systemIf you decide to use carrier phase data, configure the GeoExplofollows:

1. Decide which features you want to collect using carrier phas


3. Select Feature settings. The Select feature settings list app

189

n

More...


4. Select the name of the data dictionary to be usingduring the carrier phase data collection session. TheEdit feature settings screen appears:

NOTE This list shows all features contained in the selected datadictionary. The specified logging interval for each featureis also shown.

5. To configure an individual feature, select it from the list.The corresponding <feature> settings form appears:

NOTE Use this form to edit the logging interval and minimumnumber of positions required, and to change theaccuracy.

By default, the accuracy is set to Code. Change this toCarrier. Press e to close the form and save allchanges.

190

n

data.

.


6. Pressm to configure all points, all lines, or all areafeatures. The Edit feature settings option listappears:

NOTE Use these options to make the same change to allfeatures of a particular type.

Select one of the options. The corresponding Set all<feature type> form appears. By default, the accuracy isset to Code. Change this to Carrier. Press e toclose the form and save all changes.

You are now ready to go into the field and collect carrier phase

TIP To close a form without saving the changes, press fe

191

n

ightly different from those useder phase data collection session


In the fieldThe techniques used when collecting carrier phase data are slwhen collecting code phase (C/A code) GPS positions. A carriincludes the following tasks:

• Opening a new file using The File tab

• Collecting carrier phase data

192

n

ermined by the data dictionarycreated.

More...


Collecting carrier phase dataWhen a data file is open, the New feature list appears:

Features in this list are detspecified when the file was

193

n

More...


To collect carrier phase data:

1. Start a feature by selecting it from the New feature list. Ifthe feature is configured for carrier, the GeoExplorer 3begins logging carrier phase data. The Carrierstarted message appears briefly in the messagebox.

NOTE The logging icon will change to the carrier phase loggingicon when carrier phase logging starts.

2. Check the carrier time. As you log carrier phase data, theGeoExplorer 3 displays the time elapsed since the currentblock of data started. This is referred to as “carrier time”.The carrier time appears in the message box at theconfigured feature logging interval and shows, in minutesand seconds, the amount of data collected.

194

n

continuously for at leastge appears in the message boxen recorded.

se data.

full time before moving on toefore minimum time is

close the file.

ve logged sufficient carrierlock. All positions in this blocke processed in the GPSftware.

More...


3. Stay at the feature until you have logged carrier phase data10 minutes. The Carrier time achieved messato indicate that 10 minutes of continuous carrier data has be

4. Presse to close the feature and save the carrier pha

NOTE Trimble recommends that you occupy the first feature for theother features. For more information, see Ending a feature breached.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the next feature.

6. When you are finished collecting features, presse to

This means you hadata in the current bcan be carrier phasPathfinder Office so

195

n

xplorer 3 warns you wheneverThe Carrier lostus line. The counter is reset andssage shows 00:00.

3 writes a note to the data fileet. This records when the carriernote back at the office using thene.

reoccupy the affected features oreve the carrier precision.


If you try to close the file before the minimum time is up,the GeoExplorer 3 asks for confirmation that you want toclose the file.

While you are loggingcarrier phase data, the GeoEthe GPS receiver loses lock.message appears in the statthe Carrier time me

In addition, the GeoExplorerevery time the counter is restime was reset. Review thisGPS Pathfinder Office timeli

If the minimum time is not reached, you can choose whether tomove on. If you move on, the affected feature is unlikely to achi

196

n

the GeoExplorer 3 handheld inr utility that is part of the GPS

rrection utility. For instructions on


Back in the officeTo transfer data from the handheld to the office computer, placethe GeoExplorer 3 support module and use the Data TransfePathfinder Office software.

Process the files using the GPS Pathfinder Office Differential Coprocessing data files, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

197

ssssGPS data, you can configure thesplay coordinates using theorking in. The following topics

collection system

eoExplorer 3c edition.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Advanced functions10: Coordinate systems

10101010 Coordinate systemCoordinate systemCoordinate systemCoordinate systemWhen using the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system to collectcoordinate system, zone, and datum. This lets you enter and dicoordinate system that best suits you and the location you are ware discussed:

• Coordinate systems and datums

• Coordinate systems available on the GeoExplorer 3 data

• Using Coordinate System Manager

• Transferring coordinate systems

• Configuring coordinate systems

• Resetting coordinate systems

NOTE Transferring of coordinate systems is not available with the G

198

datumsed to describe the location ofvides you with your positionstem you have configured.

t sources, the data must beecause different datums andgle geographic location.

es relative to a mathematicalrld Geodetic System 1984 datumellipsoid and an origin point. Ansphere, which approximately

icular part of the earth). The

data capture applications,IS will represent the coordinatesr grid (running North and East)n be defined to provide a goodtransformation and a mapl ellipsoid to the GIS’s flat-earth

More...


Coordinate systems andCoordinate systems are three-dimensional reference frames usobjects in space. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system proanywhere on the earth’s surface in relation to the coordinate sy

Before you can compare geographic data obtained from differenreferenced to the same datum and coordinate system. This is bcoordinate systems provide different coordinate values for a sin

GPS positions are normally expressed as latitudes and longitudmodel called a datum. The datum used by GPS is called the Wo(or WGS-84). A datum is defined by the relationship between anellipsoid is a three-dimensional surface shaped like a squashedmodels the shape of the earth (either as a whole, or over a partWGS-84 datum is defined in terms of the GRS80 ellipsoid.

For most land-based GPS applications, and particularly for GISlatitudes and longitudes are much less convenient. Typically, a Gof geographic features in a locality of interest using a rectangulaand will presume that the earth is locally flat. A local ellipsoid caapproximation to the shape of the earth in that locality. A datumprojection are then used to transform coordinates from this locamodel.

199

r a local ellipsoid, or ansurface over which the earth’s

cations:

well

earth’s surface locally

earth’s surface as a whole

More...


Heights can be displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 relative to eitheempirically defined surface known as the geoid. The geoid is agravity is constant. (The geoid represents mean sea level.)

In summary, there are three models for describing geographic lo

• the flat North, East model of the GIS, possibly with heights as

• the curved local ellipsoid, used by the GIS as a model of the

• the curved GRS-80 ellipsoid, used by GPS as a model of the

The earth’s surface

The geoid

The local ellipsoid

The GRS-80 ellipsoid (WGS-84 datum)

200

ce the WGS-84 datum) and thenes and longitudes need to be

tudes on the WGS-84 datum intoration is called a datum

on the local datum, they mustg an operation called a mapeed to be transformed fromr reference level. The mosto as mean sea level. Theffice software both contain a

es relative to GRS-80 into

More...


These models can describe heights as being relative to either:

• an ellipsoid

or

• the geoid (mean sea level)

In order to collect the positions of features using GPS (and hensend them to a GIS as North, East coordinates, the GPS latitudprocessed in a number of ways.

They need to be transformed from latitudes, longitudes, and altilatitudes, longitudes, and altitudes on the local datum. This opetransformation.

Once the coordinates are expressed as latitudes and longitudesthen be projected into North and East values on a flat grid, usinprojection. Finally, if altitudes are to be stored by the GIS, they nheights above the GRS-80 ellipsoid to heights above some othecommon reference level is the geoid, more commonly referred tGeoExplorer 3 data collection system and the GPS Pathfinder Ogeoid separation model which enables them to transform altitudheights relative to mean sea level.

201

GPS Pathfinder Office softwaree, while GPS Pathfinder Office isrence level, or relative to a moreprocess the heights in the GPS

a map projection, so that youy have recorded) in your localsition or navigate using a mapwill be shown relative to your

bundles up the complexities ofmplexities behind the commonar. Each named coordinateid) and a number of zones (each

e Coordinate System Manageret of pre-defined coordinate


The geoid separation models used by the GeoExplorer 3 and thediffer in accuracy. The GeoExplorer 3 is necessarily approximatmore accurate. If you require altitudes relative to a different refeaccurate (perhaps local) mean sea level mode, you will need toPathfinder Office software before exporting them to your GIS.

The GeoExplorer 3 lets you specify a datum transformation andcan see your GPS position (and the position of features you macoordinate system. This makes it easy for you to check your poproduced by your GIS. It also allows you to specify that heightslocal ellipsoid, or relative to mean sea level.

For your convenience, the GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemdatum transformations and map projections, and hides these conames for the coordinate systems with which you may be familisystem has an associated datum (which encapsulates an ellipsoof which is a named instance of a particular map projection).

You can create your own coordinate systems and sites using thutility program in the GPS Pathfinder Office software. With the ssystems supplied by Trimble this should rarely be necessary.

202

lable on thection systemare supplied with two coordinate

evel or Height Above Ellipsoid)

Most National CoordinateData Transfer utility in the GPS

bal) model. This is different fromsult, MSL heights on theder Office software.

r Office software to a


Coordinate systems avaiGeoExplorer 3 data colleThe GeoExplorer 3 and GeoExplorer 3c data collection systemsystems:

• Lat/Long – latitude, longitude, and height (above Mean Sea L

• UTM – northing, easting, and elevation

There are also over 100 datums already on the GeoExplorer 3.Systems are supported, and you can easily load these using thePathfinder Office software.

NOTE You cannot use local sites.

NOTE The default geoid on the GeoExplorer 3 is the DMA 10x10 (Glothe default used by the GPS Pathfinder Office software. As a reGeoExplorer 3 may differ to those displayed in the GPS Pathfin

NOTE You cannot load coordinate systems from the GPS PathfindeGeoExplorer 3c edition.

203

Managerer Office software, to create and

er utility from GPS Pathfinder

systems and zones.

ort.

d the related support files, usethe GeoExplorer 3.


Using Coordinate SystemUse the Coordinate System Manager utility, in the GPS Pathfindedit custom coordinate systems for use with the GeoExplorer 3.

To use Coordinate System Manager:

1. On the office computer, start the Coordinate System ManagOffice.

2. Use the tabs in the main window to select or edit coordinate

3. Export the coordinate system database file. Select File/Exp

The Export dialog appears.

4. Select the Select records only option in the Export dialog.

5. Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears.

6. Specify the new file name and click Save.

When you have saved the coordinate system database files, anthe Data transfer utility to transfer the coordinate system files to


204

ystemstware, to transfer coordinaten system and the office

ake sure that the support module3 is in the

files.

e GPS Pathfinder Office


on COM 1 or GIS Datalogger onmodule is connected to), or youandheld.

xplorer 3 handheld.

More...


Transferring coordinate sUse the Data Transfer utilities, in the GPS Pathfinder Office sofsystems and grid files between the GeoExplorer 3 data collectiocomputer.

To transfer coordinate systems and grid files:

1. Place the GeoExplorer 3 handheld in the support module. Mis connected to the office computer. Once the GeoExplorerGeoExplorer 3 support module, it is ready to transfer data

2. On the office computer, start the Data Transfer utility from thsoftware.



You can use one of the predefined names (GIS DataloggerCOM 2, depending on which serial (COM) port the supportcan set up a new device definition for your GeoExplorer 3 h



205

pe field. In this case, selectFile.

, select the correct System andK.

id File, the Open dialog appearst folder used to transfer (send) a

Data Transfer dialog.

More...


5. Click Add and select the appropriate file type in the Data TyCoordinate System, Coordinate System Export File or Grid

• If you selected Coordinate System from the Add listDatum in the Coordinate System dialog, and click O

• If you selected Coordinate System Export File or Grwhere you can browse for the file. By default, the lasfile is shown. Select the file and click Open.

6. The file you selected is added to the Files to send list in the

206

nsferred. (When the size of thehe transfer, as it will use up a

More...


7. Click Transfer All. All files in the Selected Files field are trafile(s) is greater than 200 KB, you are prompted to confirm tconsiderable portion of the data collector’s memory.)

207

which zone is to be transferredion Manager can only transfern, the appropriate Coordinaterdinate System Manager utility

E files containing coordinateAmerica.CSE contains all theer utility, select Coordinatepre-defined coordinate system


NOTE You can also use the Configuration Manager utility to specifyto the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system. The Configuratone zone. If you specify a zone and transfer this configuratioSystem Export file (.CSE file) is also transferred. Use the Cooto transfer more than one zone.


NOTE The GPS Pathfinder Office software contains pre-defined CSsystems for a number of regions of the world. For example,coordinate systems for the Americas. Using the Data Transfsystem in the Data Type drop-down menu to display a list offiles.

208

ystems, zone, and datum parameters.tum transformation and a mapon of features you collect, in yourur position or to navigate using a

rs.


Configuring coordinate sYou can use the Coordinates form to edit the coordinate systemThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system lets you specify a daprojection so that you can see your GPS position, and the positilocal coordinate system. This makes it easy for you to check yomap produced by your GIS.

To configure the Coordinates form:


2. Select Configurations. The Edit configuration screen appea

3. Select Coordinates. The Coordinates form appears:

4. Use this form to specify the coordinate system, zone,datum, altitude reference, and geoid. You can also specifythe units used to display the coordinates and altitude. Formore information, see Coordinates.

209

temseoExplorer 3. To do this reset thede/Longitude and UTM, are


Resetting coordinate sysYou can remove the transferred coordinate systems from the Glist of coordinate systems. All coordinate systems, except Latituremoved.

To reset the list of coordinate systems:


2. Select Configurations.

The Edit configuration screen appears.

3. Select Coordinates. The Coordinates form appears:

4. Highlight the System field and pressm.

5. Select Reset coordinate systems. You are prompted toconfirm the reset.

6. Select Yes to remove the coordinate system file from theGeoExplorer 3. Latitude/Longitude becomes the newcurrent system. Select No to cancel the reset operation.

NOTE You cannot delete Latitude/Longitude or UTM from thelist.

IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 210

IV: IV: IV: IV: REFERENCEREFERENCEREFERENCEREFERENCEThis Reference provides detailed information about screens that appear when you use theGeoExplorer 3 data collection system.

General operation describes different ways to interact with the GeoExplorer 3. It also explainshow to use the keys and screens. Other topics correspond to different areas of the software.

The GeoExplorer 3 software is arranged in three “sections”:

• The SYS section • The DATA section • The NAV section

211

r 3 user interface and data entry

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference11: General operation

11111111 General operationGeneral operationGeneral operationGeneral operationThis section contains detailed information about the GeoExploremethods. The topics covered are:

• Turning the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on and off

• Adjusting the display

• Rebooting the GeoExplorer 3 handheld

• GeoExplorer 3 menu structure

• The GeoExplorer 3 display

• Status bar

• Interacting with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system

• Password control

212

3 handheld

ff.

ff key). A Trimble identificationorms a self-test. This is replacedys returns to the GPS tab when

the On/Off key) for one second.


Turning the GeoExploreron and offThis explains how to turn the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on and o

OnTo turn on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, presso (the On/Oscreen appears for a few seconds while the GeoExplorer 3 perfby the GPS tab. The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system alwaturned on.

OffTo turn off the GeoExplorer 3 handheld, press and hold o (

213

ode.


Adjusting the displayThis explains how to adjust the screen contrast and backlight m

• Backlight

• Screen contrast

214

reen. The screen is easiest to

nditions. The backlight is alwayshanged to one of three states byWhen the backlight is in the


BacklightThe GeoExplorer 3 handheld displays information on an LCD scread when viewed directly from the front.

The screen can be backlit to make viewing easier in poor light cooff when the GeoExplorer 3 is turned on. The backlight can be cpressing fd. The states are Off, Normal, and Bright.normal or bright state, an icon appears in the Status bar.

CAUTION Operating the backlight uses more power.

215

creen contrast. To lighten the.


Screen contrastDepending on viewing conditions, you may need to adjust the sscreen contrast, press fn. To darken it, press fs

216

rer 3

o key presses you need toto shut down.

e GeoExplorer 3 handheld to

hold down for 10 seconds. The

rm a warm boot. No data loss


Rebooting the GeoExplohandheldIf the GeoExplorer 3 handheld locks up and does not respond tperform a warm boot. This causes the GeoExplorer 3 hardware

NOTE Whenever possible, before rebooting, transmit any data in than office computer.

Warm bootTo perform a warm boot on the GeoExplorer 3, press o andGeoExplorer 3 turns off. Press o again to turn it on.

NOTE This procedure causes the GeoExplorer 3 hardware to perfoshould occur as a result of performing this procedure.

217

e Trimble logo starts spinning.ously.

d, it is too late to attempt a cold

ill remove any data file,ystems you may have loaded


Cold bootTo perform a cold boot, turn the GeoExplorer 3 handheld on. ThWhile the logo is spinning, press E and d simultane

NOTE Once the logo stops spinning and the first screen is displayeboot. Repower the unit and try again.

WARNING This procedure clears the memory of the GeoExplorer 3. It wconfigurations, data dictionaries, waypoints, or coordinate sonto the GeoExplorer 3.

218

cture, DATA, and NAV.

screen. To move between tabs,. Each time you press the

xample, to move between the. As you move between the SYS

nt. Alternatively, you can use the

n, press the corresponding key3 handheld. For example, tosection to the DATA section,


GeoExplorer 3 menu struThe GeoExplorer 3 firmware is arranged in three sections: SYS

Within each section are three tabs that appear at the top of thepress the corresponding section key: s, d, ornsame section key, you move to another tab in that section. For ethree different tabs in the SYS section, presss three timestabs (GPS, Status, and Setup), the current tab moves to the fromain menu to move between sections and tabs.

To move to a sectioon the GeoExplorermove from the SYSpress d.

219

ns and their corresponding tabs.

the arrow keys to highlight the

section is File. When a data file

r 3c edition.

arrow keys to move aroundn menu. The currently activeighlighted. Press E toe Main menu and go to thetab.


Main menuUse the Main menu to move around the system and view sectioPress fm to display the Main menu.

For example, to move from the Chart tab to the Status tab, useStatus tab and then pressE.

NOTE When no data file is open, the only tab available in the DATAis open, the New, Update, and Map tabs are all available.

NOTE The Map and Chart tabs are not available in the GeoExplore

Use thethe Maitab is hclose thcurrent

Currenttab

Section

DATA tabsNAV tabs

SYS tabs

keys

220

e satellites that theand their relative positions in

current position.e GeoExplorer 3 hardware,l connections.

ionaries and feature settings.the configuration. You candata collection system to the

open an existing one.attributes.

ibutes.them for update.

More...


Section tabsThis table summarizes each of the tabs:

Use this tab … to …

SYS

GPS view information about thGeoExplorer 3 is trackingthe sky, and to see your

Status view information about thaccessories, and externa

Setup create and edit data dictAlso, use this tab to editreset the GeoExplorer 3factory defaults.

DATA

File create a new data file or

New collect new features andUpdate update features and attrMap view features and select

221

waypoints using the Road.waypoints using the

waypoints using the Chart.


NAV

Road navigate to features and

Compass navigate to features andCompass.

Chart navigate to features and

Use this tab … to …

222

re3 menu structure. Use them as a

Dataictionary

Featuresettings

ResetAbout

mmmm

Feature Feature

mmmm

list list

mmmm

mmmm

More...


GeoExplorer 3 section structuThe next three diagrams provide an outline of the GeoExplorerhandy reference until you are familiar with the structure.

GPS tab SETUP tabSTATUS tab

Configurationmode

Standardmode

Advancedmode

StandardmodeDGPS

d

Dataform

GPSform

Real-timeform

Coordinatesform

Unitsform

Formatsform

COMMSform

Otherform

ssss

mmmm mmmm

mmmm mmmm

223

Deletefile(s)

Rename BaseStationfile(s)

mmmm mmmm

Position/

elete LayersFilter

mmmm

earch

Search

mmmm

SummarySet/ClearTarget

Set/ClearTarget

More...


entryText

mmmm

NEW tab MAP tabUPDATE tab

New feature list Update feature list

FILE tab

entry form

mmmm

mmmmAttributeentry form

mmmm

Attribute

ddddmmmm

entryNumeric

entryMenu

entryDate & Time

mmmmOffset Segment

mmmm

Sort(Un)Delete Filter

mmmm

inZoom

outZoom

extentsZoom

SelectPan/ D

mmmm

mmmm

S

mmmm

ContinueRepeat

mmmm

line/area

Newvertex

224

CHART tab

mmmm

outoom

extentsZoom

SelectPan/Info

windows

t waypointsEdit Delete

waypoints

mmmm mmmm

startSelect Layers


ROAD tab COMPASS tab

nnnn

mmmm mmmm

windowsInfo

targetSelect

waypointNew

waypointsEdit Delete Select

waypoints startRoadscale

mmmm mmmm mmmm

windowsInfo

targetSelect

waypointNew

waypointsEdit Delete Select

waypoints startCalibration

mmmm mmmm mmmm

inZoom Z

targetSelect

waypoinNew

mmmm

225

ythe GeoExplorer 3 display.


The GeoExplorer 3 displaSome common displays are shown here to describe features of

Active section

Status

Field

Tabs

Buttons

Title

Fieldprompt

List

Messagebox

value

bar

226

visible. The icons displayeder 3 data collection system. Forlow.

onn

More...


Status barThe status bar is the area of the display on the right. It is alwaysdepend on what you are doing, and the status of the GeoExplorexample, the memory icon flashes when the memory is critically

Internal power icon

Satellite icon

Real-time position icExternal antenna icoLock iconMemory icon

Logging icon

Backlight icon

Target icon

227

accompanied by a warningwithin 15 meters of the target.

try of the satellites is good orS configuration settings. Thisstatus bar. When the

tion system is computing GPSthe satellite icon indicates

ing used to compute positions.warn you that the geometry of

umber flashes to indicate thatble. You need a minimum ofPS positions.

More...


Icon Name DescriptionTarget icon Shows for three seconds (

beep) when you approach

Satellite icon Shows whether the geomepoor depending on the GPicon is always visible in theGeoExplorer 3 data collecpositions the number belowhow many satellites are beThe satellite icon flashes tothe satellites is poor. The ntoo few satellites are availafour satellites to compute G

228

rer 3 is computing real-timeosition icon flashes when the-only mode and a real-time, or when the RTCM age limit

ed on The Status tab. Tottings, use the Real-time

nal antenna is properlyrnal antenna is connected thisot appear, there is a problemantenna (internal andlayed on the Status tab.

n setting or task is locked. Toassword control.

More...


Real-timeposition icon

Shows that the GeoExplopositions. The real-time pGeoExplorer 3 is in RTCMposition cannot be loggedhas been exceeded.RTCM details are displayconfigure the real-time sebutton.

External antennaicon

Shows whether the exterconnected. When an exteicon appears. If it does nwith the connection. Theexternal) details are disp

Lock icon Shows that a configuratiounlock it you must have P

Icon Name Description

229

evel is low (< 100 KB). Thisaining memory is critically

ry details are shown on The

is on. The backlight has twond Bright. When the backlightchange the state of the

.

ernal power source. This iconatus bar. The battery iconel of the power source is high.source decreases, the leveldecreases. The icon flashes

l is low. The battery iconthe internal power is being

etails are displayed on

More...


Memory icon Shows that the memory licon flashes when the remlow (< 10 KB). The memoStatus tab.

Backlight icon Shows that the Backlightdifferent states: Normal ais off no icon is visible. Tobacklight press fd

Internal powericon

Shows the level of the intis always visible in the stappears full when the levAs the level of the powershown by the battery iconto warn you that the leveappears to be filling whencharged. Power source dThe Status tab.


Normal

Bright

230

xplorer 3 is successfullyis icon appears to be drawing

g GPS data; in the case ofncentric circles repeatedly

ove the icon indicates hown logged for the currenth if conditions do not meet theion. The logging icon has four

lorer 3 is logginge) measurements.lorer 3 has paused whiles. When logging is paused,ps recording GPS positionsWhen you start logging again,sumes logging GPS positionso the logging icon.

More...


Logging icon Shows whether the GeoElogging GPS positions. Thwhen successfully logginaveraged vertices, the cocontract.The number displayed abmany positions have beefeature. The icon will flasspecified GPS configuratdifferent states:

• Normal – the GeoExpcode phase (C/A cod

• Paused – the GeoExplogging GPS positionthe GeoExplorer 3 stoand this icon flashes.the GeoExplorer 3 reand the icon reverts t


Normal

Paused

231

rer 3 is logging carrier phaserier phase data collection orthe Feature settings button tocarrier accuracy.

GeoExplorer 3 is loggingthin a line or area feature.


Logging icon(continued)

• Carrier – the GeoExplomeasurements for Carfor a base station. Useconfigure a feature for

• Averaged vertex – theAveraged vertices wi


Carrier

Averagedvertex

232

xplorer 3

n a variety of ways. The following


Interacting with the GeoEdata collection systemYou can interact with the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system itopics describe the keypad and the different types of displays:

• Keys

• Screens

• Lists

• Forms

• Option lists

• Pop-up messages

• Data entry

233

r 3 handheld.

/Off

tion

tion

keys

More...


KeysThis diagram shows the location of the keys on the GeoExplore

Power On

EnterOp

SYS section

DATA section

NAV sec

Log

Function

ArrowClose

234

rer 3 handheld on and off.the GeoExplorer 3 when inGeoExplorer 3 support

NAV sections to an active tab

the SYS section then pressinggh the SYS tabs.

AV sections to an active tab in

the DATA section thenles through the DATA tabs.

More...


This table explains the various keys:

Key Name Use this key to …

o Power On/Off power the GeoExploAlso used to activateStandby mode in themodule.

s SYS section move from DATA orin The SYS section.If you are already ins cycles throu

d DATA section move from SYS or NThe DATA section.If you are already inpressing d cyc

235

ATA sections to an active tab

the NAV section then pressinggh the NAV tabs.

ighlight.

ighlight.ric digits in a numeric entry

play.and saving features and data

to move up sub levels.

More...


n NAV section move from SYS or Din The NAV section.If you are already inn cycles throu

2 4 Arrow keys move the cursor or h

15

Arrow keys move the cursor or hScroll through numefield.

e Close close the current disThis includes closingfiles. Also press e


236

d item.ver you want to choose anen a field to edit.

me GPS logging.to control logging from almostt the GeoExplorer 3 data

y is explained inAdvanced datalogging

vanced options that areurrent screen.ne or more advanced options

key.

More...


E Enter select the highlightePress E wheneitem from a list or op

l Log start, pause, or resu

l can be usedany place throughoucollection system.Use of the l keCollecting data andoptions.

m Option display the list of adavailable from your cMost screens have oavailable from the m


237

y function of certain keys.shown in blue on the keypad.function, press f and thenfunction key. You do not needs at the same time.

More...


f Function access the secondarThese functions areTo use a secondarypress the secondaryto hold down the key


238

reen and cancel any changes.es to GPS or featurebe prompted to confirm the

.to select the tab you want to

.

s, d, or n topropriate screen.

ast.

.ings—Bright, Normal, and Off.

More...


Function Use this keycombination …

to …

Cancel fe close the current scThis includes changattributes. You maycancel operation.

Menu fm go to the Main menuUse the arrow keysgo to, then press EAlternatively, pressgo directly to the ap

Decrease contrast fs darken display contr

Backlight fd control the backlightThere are three sett

239

ast.

he top of the current display.cursor half a screen upwards.

he bottom of the currentthe Map cursor half a screen

More...


Increase contrast fn lighten display contr

Page up f1 page up.Move the cursor to tAlso moves the Map

Page down f5 page down.Move the cursor to tdisplay. Also movesdownwards.


to …

240

ing of a list or form.nd forms. Also moves the Mapto the left.

a list or form.nd forms. Also moves the Mapto the right.


Home f2 return to the beginnUseful in long lists acursor half a screen

End f4 return to the end ofUseful in long lists acursor half a screen


to …

241

nerally graphical and provideat let you access other displays.the options. Use screens to viewto other areas in the firmware.mation displayed.

e GPS screen in the GPS tab.n in different modes. Thisndard mode.

e to Advanced mode; press itard mode.

More...


ScreensIn the GeoExplorer 3, the top level screens for each tab are gequick visual feedback. Alternatively, a screen contains buttons thIn most of the screens you can press them key to displayinformation graphically or to select buttons that provide accessYou cannot enter data in a screen, and you cannot edit the infor

This example shows thYou can view this screeexample shows the Sta

Pressm to changagain to return to Stand

242

reen in the Setup tab.

o not need to close a screen to

to other areas of theection system. To select ae the arrow keys to highlight it

.


This example shows a screen with buttons. This is the Select sc

Screens are “live”—any changes take place immediately. You dactivate changes.

Buttons provide accessGeoExplorer 3 data collbutton from a screen, usand then pressE

243

ation or messages that may orntal line(s). The fields shown are


Message boxesA message box appears in some screens. It shows useful informmay not be separated from other data on the screen by a horizoread-only. They cannot be changed or edited.

Messagebox

244

ts, the GeoExplorer 3 provides aailable in the GeoExplorer 3 datas.

eful information about the item

the list, one page at a time.

list.

ate feature list, as shown in thest displays all features stored ina file. To select an item from arow keys to highlight the item

.

More...


ListsWhen selecting data files, data dictionaries, features, or waypoinlist. A list contains the information that is currently stored and avcollection system. A list always has a title that describes the item

A message box is often displayed below the list and provides uscurrently highlighted.

To close a list press e .

Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or down

Press f2 or f4 to move to the first or last item in the

This is the Updtitle bar. This lithe current datlist, use the arand press E

Title bar

Message box

245

ical fashion. If you position thehighlight moves to the lastlast option and press 5 the


NOTE All option lists, sublists, forms, and checklists scroll in a cyclhighlight on the first (top) option in the list and press 1 the(bottom) option. Similarly, if you position the highlight on thehighlight moves to the top option.

246

ace in forms. These are likefields.

lue. A prompt is followed by aator fields, which have no value

being highlighted. Any editinglect it by highlighting it and

se a form to enter information.

More...


FormsData entry in the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system takes plpaper forms, in that they have a title and a sequence of lines or

Each field generally has two parts, a prompt (or name) and a vacolon (:) that separates it from the value. Some fields are separand serve simply to divide a form into sections.

One field in every form is the current field. It is distinguished byoperations on a form apply to the current field. To edit a field, sepressing E .

Title

ValuePrompt

Current field

U

247

t as soon as you accept the

page at a time. This isto move to the first or last field in

ished editing a field in the form,ture attribute entry form is open,


There are three ways to enter data into a form:

• Text entry

• Numeric entry

• Pop-up list

A form is “live”. When you edit a field, the new value takes effecchange by pressinge.

Press f1 or f5 to move up or down the form, oneequivalent to page up and page down. Usef2 orf4the form. This is equivalent to Home and End.

When you have finished browsing through the form, or have finpresse to return to the previous screen or list. When a feayou can also press fe to abandon the feature.

248

rmware you can press thewhen the Chart tab is active. The

bar appears on the right. Use

the option list, one page at an in the list. To close an option

ent option in a list is highlighted.a different option, press1 orove the highlight and then press


Option listsOption lists display additional functions. In some places in the fim key to display the options. For example, pressmfollowing options appear:

If an option list has more options than fit on one screen, a scroll1 or 5 to scroll up and down the list.

Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or downtime. Press f2 orf4 to move to the first or last optiolist press m again, or press e .

CurrentThe currTo select5 to mE .

option

Optionlist

Scrollbar

249

. For example, if you select thelist appears:

the sublist, one page at a time.sublist. To close a sublist, press

urrent option in a sublist isghted. To select a different, press1 or5 to move the

ght and then press E .


SublistsSome options open into a sublist. A sublist relates to that optionFilter option from the Update feature option list, the Filter by sub

Press f1 or f5 to move the highlight up or downUsef2 orf4 to move to the first or last option in thee .

Update feature

Current

Filter by

Filter

The chighlioptionhighli

option

sublist

option list

250

Scroll bar

Checklisttitle


ChecklistsSome option lists open into a checklist. Ifyou select Info windows from the Roadoption list, for example, the Info windowschecklist appears:

To select an item in a checklist, use thearrow keys to highlight it and then pressE . When it is selected a✓ appears in the box on the left. To cleara ✓ , use the arrow keys to highlight theitem and pressE . The ✓ isremoved.

To close a checklist and save yourchanges, presse . To cancel anychanges, pressfe .

251

s up”. When the GeoExplorer 3ops up with two buttons, one ofTo do this, press 2 or 4 toen press E .

for Yes/No questions.

ample of a pop-up message.essages should be noted,

t information about the task you

creen, presse.

Explorer 3 messages.


Pop-up messagesOccasionally, a message “popasks a question, a message pwhich you select in response.highlight your response and th

TIP Presse to select No

The Error screen is another exWarning! and Error! mbecause they contain importanare trying to perform.

To clear a message from the s

For more information, see Geo

252

end on the type of data to be

ch attribute in the data dictionary.es, or you can use thee the default value.

incrementing attributes. Eachlue that is calculated by


Data entryThere are three ways to enter data. The methods available depentered:

• Text entry

• Numeric entry

• Pop-up list

To save time on data entry, a default value can be defined for eaYou can either accept the default value that the system generatappropriate data entry method for that attribute to edit or replac

In addition, text and numeric attributes can be defined as Auto-new instance of an auto-incrementing attribute has a default vaincreasing or decreasing the last value by a specified amount.

253

d contains the following:

• Function bar

ress m to view theption list.

More...


Text entryYou can enter text using the text entry field.

Use the Edit bar and characters to enter text. The text entry fiel

• Attribute/Field name • Edit bar

• Characters • Close bar

Attribute/Field name

Function bar

Characters

Edit bar

Close bar

CursorPO

254

ibute or field.cursor flashes to indicate its

rs to the left of the cursor. Tohighlight the BKSP !!!!

.

the Edit bar. Use the arrow keysand then pressE .

characters from uppercase tothe arrow keys to highlight the

.

plete the text value byt match the text entered so far.

he Matches function, whichtrings. PressE to displayrings, highlight a string, andrt this string in the Edit bar.

More...


Use this area … to …Attribute/Field name view the name of the selected attrEdit bar enter or change the text value. The

current location in the Edit bar.Function bar • Use BKSP !!!! to delete characte

backspace use the arrow keys tofunction and then press E

• Use SPACE to insert a space into highlight the SPACE function

• Use the A➜➜➜➜ a function to changelowercase (and vice versa). UseA➜➜➜➜ a function and then pressE

• Use the Matches function to comselecting from a list of strings thaUse the arrow keys to highlight tshows the number of matching sa Pop-up list of the matching stthen press E again to inse

255

ntry. To insert a character inhighlight the desired

any changes. To save thekeys to highlight Close (atpress E . You can also

e form to save the new text. To cancel any changes ande .


Characters select the characters for the text ethe Edit bar, use the arrow keys tocharacter and then press E .

Close bar close the text entry field and saveentry in the Edit bar, use the arrowthe bottom of the keypad) and thenpress e from anywhere in thand go to back to the previous formrestore the original value, press f

Use this area … to …

256

• Text completion

More...


Option list

Press m , from the text entry field, to view the options.

The options are:

• Clear • Change style

257

ly entered in the Edit bar.that you can select. Choose

ilable when you are entering


Use this option... to …Clear clear (delete) the text that is currentChange style change the layout of the characters

from ABCDEF and QWERTY.Text completion enable or disable Text completion.

NOTE Text completion is only avaor editing attribute values.

258

d up data entry by using the textxplorer 3 data collection system

e text strings you have enteredom the GPS Pathfinder Office

Edit bar with the matching textrrent attribute. Strings are rankedtered so far, the one you used

g

sible matches

More...


Text completion

When you are entering or editing attribute values, you can speecompletion function. When text completion is enabled, the GeoEcompares the text you have entered so far against a list of all thpreviously, and all the attribute values in data files transferred frsoftware.

If a match is found, the system fills in the rest of the string in thefrom the list. The list contains all the possible matches for the cuby age, so if more than one string matches the text you have enmore recently is the one that is suggested.

Matching strinEntered textNumber of pos

259

ter, pressf4 to accept theEdit bar. You can still edit the text

enter, delete it by either selecting

strings in the list match the textss E, an alphabeticalfrom the list and pressE toop-up list without selecting a

atch is highlighted in the list ofs.

More...


If the suggested text is correct, or close to the text you want to ensuggested text and move the cursor to the end of the text in thethat is displayed after you have accepted the suggested text.

If the suggestion is not sufficiently similar to the text you want toBKSP !!!! and pressingE, or entering another character.

The Matches function in the function bar shows you how manyyou have entered so far. If you select this function and then prepop-up list of the matches appears. You can then select a stringinsert it into the Edit bar, or you can press e to close the pstring.

The predicted mpossible matche

260

matches, highlight it in the list,elected string is removed from

ar all strings from the list.


If a string that you want to remove appears in the pop-up list ofpress m to display the option list, and select Delete. The sthe list and will no longer be matched to any text you enter.

TIP Use the Reset text list option in the Setup tab’s Reset list to cle

261

nter data.


Numeric entryThere are two types of numeric entry fields into which you can e

• Single numeric entry

• Multiple option numeric entry

262

try, a field similar to this appears:

s highlighted press1 or5 tot of each other. Press E tobecomes the new value for thentry “field” and save changes. Toged it) press fe .

ll is 9, press 1 to change thege the value to 9.


Single numeric entry

When you select a numeric field that requires single numeric en

It contains a title, units and numeric cells.

To enter a value, press2 or4 to highlight a cell. When a cell iscroll the value in the cell from 0 to 9. The cells are independensave the new value. When you pressE the value enteredselected field. You can also presse to close the numeric ecancel changes and restore the original value (before you chan

NOTE The cells scroll in a circular fashion. When the value in the cevalue to 0. When the value in the cell is 0, press 5 to chan

Title

Units

Cell

263

d similar to one of these appears:

umeric cells, and three options.ption has a highlighted radiorn is the selected option.

e corresponding radio button is

More...


Multiple option numeric entry

When you select a numeric field that has multiple options, a fiel

In the Warning distance field shown here, there is a title, units, nEach option has a corresponding “radio button”. The selected obutton surrounded by a shaded box. In this example, Always wa

To change the option that is selected, press 1 or5 until thhighlighted.

Cell

Title

Units

“Radio button”

Options

Title

Selectedoption

264

ighlight a numeric cell. When youutton disappears to indicate that5 to scroll the number in thathe cells are independent of each

the value of the selectede to close the numeric

fore your changes), press

e cell is 9, press1 to changehange the value to 9.


To change the value for the selected option, press2 or4 to hhighlight a cell, the shaded box around the corresponding radio ba numeric cell is selected. With a cell highlighted, press 1 orcell from 0 through 9. To move between cells, press2 or4. Tother. Press E to save the new setting. When you pressEoption becomes the new value for the field. You can also pressentry field and save changes.

To cancel changes and restore values to the original setting (befe .

NOTE Values in a cell scroll in a cyclical way. When the value in ththe value to 0. When the value in the cell is 0, press5 to c

265

p list appears:

rent value, press 1 or5 to

More...


Pop-up listWhen you select a field that has many possible values, a pop-u

The current value in a pop-up list is highlighted. To select a diffemove the highlight and then press E .

Field name

List of values forthe selected field

266

bar appears on the right. Use

light on the first (top) value in) value. Similarly, if you

, the highlight moves to thelast option in the list.


If a pop-up list has more options than fit on one screen, a scroll1 or 5 to scroll up and down the list.

NOTE A pop-up list scrolls in a cyclical way. If you position the highthe list and press 1, the highlight moves to the last (bottomposition the highlight on the last value in the list and press 5top value. Press f2 or f4 to move to the first or

Scroll bar

267

ta collection system, you can setathfinder Office software toinformation, refer to the GPS

ettings to be changed. If youe settings to be altered, lock

ears in the Status bar.

More...


Password controlTo lock configuration settings and tasks on the GeoExplorer 3 daa password. Use the Configuration Manager utility in the GPS Pindicate which configuration settings and tasks to lock. For morePathfinder Office Help.

Locking and unlocking is useful when you do not want certain screate a configuration for a certain job and you do not want somthem by applying a password.

When configuration settings or tasks are locked, a lock icon app

Lock icon

268

ld value as well as in the status

.) You are prompted to enterrd, the field unlocks and you can

data collection system remains


When a field is locked, the lock icon appears to the left of the fiebar.

To edit a locked field, select it. (Highlight the field and pressEthe password, using Text entry. If you enter the correct passwoedit the field.

NOTE If a configuration setting or task is locked, the GeoExplorer 3password locked when turned off.

Lock icon in field

Lock icon in status bar

269

etting, you can remove the lock.this, pressm from the top


Re-lock optionIf you need to make changes to a locked task or configuration sTo prevent further changes, lock the field again afterwards. To dolevel of The Setup tab (the Select screen) and select Re-lock.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 270

SYS section – Introduction

THE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONTHE SYS SECTIONUse the SYS section to view GPS satellite information, check your current position, check thehardware status, and determine the quality of the GPS signal being received. Use it to configurethe GeoExplorer 3 data collection system settings, create or edit data dictionaries, and alterfeature settings.

Press s to move between the tabs in the SYS section. They are:

• The GPS tab • The Status tab • The Setup tab

271

e. The Standard mode screen

PS status. It contains:

• Signal strength

e GPS tab to view informationthe satellites that thexplorer 3 is tracking, and theire positions.

m to view theced mode.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 12: The GPS tab

12121212 The GPS tabThe GPS tabThe GPS tabThe GPS tabs / GPS

To display the GPS tab, press s until the GPS tab is activappears:

The Standard mode of the GPS tab is a graphical view of the G

• Skyplot • Current GPS position

• Satellite geometry

Skyplot

SignalUse thaboutGeoErelativ

PressAdvan

strength

Current

Satellitegeometry

position

272

atellites available to the receiver:

represents the configuredr circle of the skyplot movesets smaller and only thoseIf the elevation mask ise horizon are used to compute

k

r

More...


SkyplotThe skyplot provides a graphical display of the position of the s

The outer circle represents the horizon (at 0° ). The inner circleElevation mask. When the elevation mask is changed, the inneaccordingly. If the elevation mask is increased, the inner circle gsatellites higher in the sky are used to compute GPS positions.decreased, the inner circle gets larger and satellites closer to thGPS positions.

Skyplot

Horizon

Elevation mas

North indicato

Satellitesoverhead

273

he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionthe sky (overhead), while thosee satellite can be determined by

e skyplot.

xes are currently being used byte GPS positions. Satellites withd, but are not being used towith no boxes are available, butGeoExplorer 3.

mpass) to indicate what directionin.

or faster, or if you haveCalibration.


Numbered boxes represent the satellites currently available to tsystem. The satellites near the center of the circle are higher intoward the edge are closer to the horizon. The location of any onnoting its direction (N, S, E, W) and approximate elevation in th

Satellites shown as black bothe GeoExplorer 3 to compuclear boxes are being trackecompute positions. Satellitesare not being tracked by the

The skyplot rotates (like a cothe GeoExplorer 3 is pointing

NOTE The skyplot only rotates if you are moving at walking speedcalibrated the internal digital compass. For more details, see

274

. It displays the coordinates,

nate system and datum. If thenfiguration use the Coordinates

, open a data file and start a

plorer 3 searches the sky fornals. It then determines which topute the current GPS position,e configured GPS settings. Ther 3 needs a minimum of fourcompute GPS positions.


Current GPS positionThe current GPS position is shown at the bottom of the GPS tabaltitude, and datum:

Values are displayed in terms of the currently configured coordidatum name is too long, it appears truncated. To change this coform.

For more information, see Coordinate systems.

NOTE Positions viewed on the screen are not saved. To save themfeature, or create a waypoint.

The GeoExsatellite siguse to combased on thGeoExploresatellites to

Altitude and datumCoordinates

275

ully computing GPS positions, aof the screen.

atellites and to calculate theosition.

splayed once per second.

e computed, look formight be blocking satelliteay from any possiblee GeoExplorer 3 is still not

ons, see Potential problems.

More...


Message boxWhen the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is not successfdescriptive message appears in the message box at the bottom

When you turn the GeoExplorer 3 on, it begins to track visible scurrent position. It takes up to 45 seconds to calculate the first p

Once the first position is displayed, subsequent positions are di

TIP If no positions arobstructions thatsignals. Move awobstructions. If thcomputing positi

276

satellites are available, twoges indicate that the GPSatellites to compute a new one.

the number below the satelliteen when the GPS tab is not

More...


If the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing positions because too fewwarning messages alternate in the message box. These messaposition displayed is an old position and that there are too few s

NOTE When there are too few satellites to compute GPS positions,icon in the Status bar flashes. This icon is always visible, evactive.

277

e geometry is poor, two warningate that the GPS position

es is poor.

in the Status bar flashes. This


If the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing positions because satellitmessages alternate in the message box. These messages indicdisplayed is an old position and that the geometry of the satellit

NOTE When the geometry of the satellites is poor, the satellite iconicon is always visible, even when the GPS tab is not active.

For more information, see Satellite geometry.

278

e signal quality of each satelliteof a satellite must be sufficienta satellite with a signal strengthsatellite that is not being used toured minimum level.)


Signal strengthThe signal strength bar graph is a graphical representation of ththat the GeoExplorer 3 is currently tracking. The signal strengthbefore it can be used by a GPS receiver. A black bar representsabove the configured minimum level. An empty bar represents acompute GPS positions. (The signal strength is below the config

To change the minimum level, use the GPS slider bar.

Strengthof signalbar graph

Minimumlevel

279

el on the indicator is high. Ifmputed positions is reduced. The

Explorer 3 stops computing GPSTo change it, use the GPS slider

Level of qualityMinimum level

Satellite geometryindicator


Satellite geometryThe satellite geometry indicator is agraphical representation of the overallquality of the GPS positionscomputed.

The quality of the computed positionsis a function of the geometry of thevisible satellites (how they arepositioned in the sky relative to eachother). When the satellites are wellspaced, and cover a large portion ofthe sky, the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system is able to compute accurate positions. The levsatellites are grouped together in the sky, the accuracy of the colevel on the indicator is low.

When the level of quality falls below the minimum level, the Geopositions. The minimum level accepted is a configurable value.bar.

280

elect Advanced mode.

on:

PDOP mask.

lev

lmanac

en to view information abouttext. The message box at the

screen displays Almanacnd the current PDOP.

the Standard mode, pressselect Standard mode.

More...


Advanced modes / GPS / m / Advanced mode

To display the GPS tab in Advanced mode, press m and s

Advanced mode of the GPS tab displays the following informati

NOTE Use the GPS slider bar to configure the elevation, SNR, and

• PRN • SNR • E

• Br(T) or Br(M) • PDOP • A

Use this scresatellites asbottom of theinformation a

To return tom and

Message box

281

ite. This number is used tollite is currently being used by✓ appears to the left of the

tellite. The signal strength of antent of the signal, relative totellite at 30° elevation isPS position is degraded if theellation falls below 4.0.lets you set the SNR mask.e signal strength of a satellitethe GPS receiver. If aR mask, that satellite is not

althy” by the GPS Controlppear in the SNR column for

More...


This column... lists...PRN the pseudorandom number of each satell

uniquely identify each satellite. If the satethe GeoExplorer 3 to compute positions, aPRN.

SNR the current signal-to-noise ratio of each sasatellite is a measure of the information cothe signal’s noise. The typical SNR of a sabetween 10.0 and 15.0. The quality of a GSNR of one or more satellites in the constThe GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemThis value is used to determine whether this sufficient for that satellite to be used bysatellite’s SNR is below the configured SNused to compute positions.

NOTE If a satellite is marked as “unheSegment, the characters “U/H” athat satellite.

282

each satellite. A satellite thatnot used to compute

bearing is shown relative to), as determined by the


Elev the current elevation above the horizon ofis below the configured Elevation mask ispositions.

Br(T) or Br(M) the current bearing to each satellite. Thiseither true north (T) or magnetic north (Mcurrently configured North reference.

This column... lists...

283

ction of the geometry of the GPStellites are well separated in themore satellites are closeerent in measuring their signals

with GPS. These factors give anstem (GPS). DOP factors arebest. The best overall indicatorn, or PDOP.

More...


PDOPThe accuracy of a position computed by a GPS receiver is a funconstellation visible at that moment in time. When the visible sasky, the GPS receiver can compute accurate positions. If two ortogether at the time the position is recorded, the small errors inhcompound, reducing the accuracy of computed positions.

There are several Dilution of Precision (DOP) factors associatedindication of the expected accuracy of the Global Positioning Sylinear multipliers on the expected error, so a small DOP value isof satellite constellation geometry is Position Dilution of Precisio

284

shows how PDOP values are

mask as an upper limit on PDOPcy, and makes sure that thes above this mask, the

by the satellite icon in the


The PDOP value is a measure of positional accuracy. This tablecategorized.

The GeoExplorer 3 lets you specify a PDOP mask. It uses thisvalues. You can configure the desired level of positional accurapositions logged are of a certain quality. When the PDOP climbGeoExplorer 3 stops computing GPS positions. This is indicatedStatus bar.

PDOP level Quality1 to 4 Excellent4 to 6 Good6 to 8 Fair8 to 12 Poor12 to 100 Very poor100 and above Unusable

285

over a moderately long period ofation and information about ther time). The GeoExplorer 3 uses

new almanac. It can collect an

f the Advanced mode screenate of the current almanac. Ifed instead of the almanac date,Explorer 3 has not yet collectedlmanac.


AlmanacAn almanac is a set of data that is used to predict satellite orbitstime, usually about a month. The almanac contains clock informorbital path for each satellite (where it is in the sky at a particulait to get a lock on satellites.

The GeoExplorer 3 takes approximately 15 minutes to collect aalmanac and compute positions at the same time.

An almanac is required by Trimble’s Quick Plan software.


The bottom odisplays the dN/A is displaythen the Geoa complete a

Almanac date

286

tab

ctive. It appears in Standard

rmation about theccessories, and external

tatus tab in DGPS mode.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 13: The Status

13131313 The Status tabThe Status tabThe Status tabThe Status tabs / Status

To display the Status tab, press s until the Status tab is amode.

In Standard mode, the Status tab displays:

• Hardware

• Accessories and external connections

Use this screen to view infoGeoExplorer 3 hardware, aconnections.

You can also display the S

287

tab

hown on the inside of the

Number of files to transfer

More...


HardwareInformation about the status of the GeoExplorer 3 hardware is sGeoExplorer 3 diagram.

This screen displays the following hardware information:

• Memory gauge • Power level •

Number ofkilobytes free

Number offiles totransfer

Powerremaining Power gauge

Memorygauge

288

tab

rtion of the GeoExplorer 3ailable. The lower the level onilable. The higher the level onable. The number of kilobytes

indicated by the power gaugesplayed on the bottom right ofe level on the gauge, the moreel, the less internal powerwer is indicated on the left of

an office computer is indicatedgram. This number indicates

that have not been transferredstem to an office computer.


Display DescriptionMemory gauge The memory gauge is shown in the top po

diagram. It shows the level of memory avthe gauge, the more memory there is avathe gauge, the less memory there is avail(KB) free is also displayed.

Power level The amount of internal power remaining isand a percentage. The power gauge is dithe GeoExplorer 3 diagram. The higher thinternal power remains. The lower the levremains. The percentage of remaining pothe power gauge.

Number of filesto transfer

The number of files not yet transferred toin the bottom left of the GeoExplorer 3 diathe number of data files, base and rover,from the GeoExplorer 3 data collection sy

289

tab

l

tions is shown in the four panels

• Power

More...


Accessories and externaconnectionsInformation about accessories and the status of external connecsurrounding the GeoExplorer 3 diagram.

This screen displays the following information:

• Real-time • Antenna • Transfer

Real-time

Power

Antenna

Transfer

290

tab

nding on how thenfigured, one of five icons or

he GeoExplorer 3 data collectionover the cable-free link.

hen connected to the, the current status of the BoB isle states are Locked, Tracking,quency being tracked or locked

con. The histogram on the left ofl-to-noise ratio) of the differentiald. If the differential GPS beaconen the frequency that it ised, and the SNR histogram is

GeoExplorer 3 data collectionover the cabled link.

More...


This panel … shows …Real-time the current real-time position status. Depe

GeoExplorer 3 data collection system is comessages is displayed:

Cable-free BoB – Indicates that tsystem is using the BoB receiver

Cabled and Cable-free BoB – WBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiverindicated in the panel. The possibSearching, or Idle. The current freonto is displayed below the BoB ithe icon indicates the SNR (signaGPS beacon signal being receiveis not locked onto a frequency, thcurrently trying to track is displayempty.

Cabled BoB – Indicates that thesystem is using the BoB receiver

291

tab

Explorer 3 is using an external

Explorer 3 is not receiving

that there are not enoughtions. Without a GPS position, ite position.

at the geometry of the satellitesis not generated.

More...


Real-time(continued)

This panel … shows …

Other – Indicates that the Georadio for real-time corrections.

None – Indicates that the Georeal-time corrections.

Too few satellites – Indicatessatellites to compute GPS posiis not possible to get a real-tim

Too fewsatellites

Poor geometry – Indicates this poor, so a real-time position

Poorgeometry

292

tab

oExplorer 3 is using the internal

e GeoExplorer 3 is using the

More...


Antenna the type of antenna in use.This panel … shows …

Built-in – Indicates that the Geantenna.

Built-in

Connected – Indicates that thexternal antenna.

293

tab

ossible states:

Explorer 3 is not sending or

– Indicates that thean office computer. Movementof the transfer indicates thatssage OK appears above ther is complete, File Errorwas unsuccessful. The number

ed is indicated on the bottom of

oExplorer 3 is outputting NMEA

More...


Transfer the data transfer status. There are three pThis panel … shows …

IDLE – Indicates that the Georeceiving data.

IDLE

Connected and transferringGeoExplorer 3 is connected toalong the cable in the directiondata is being transferred. A metransfer icon when data transfeindicates that the data transferof bytes successfully transferrthis icon.

NMEA – Indicates that the Gemessages.

294

tab

e type of power source, one of

eoExplorer 3 is using the

sing an external power source.

connected to an external power


Power the type of power source. Depending on ththree icons is displayed:

This panel … shows …

Internal – Indicates that the Ginternal power source.

Internal

External – Indicates that it is u

Charging – Indicates that it issource and is charging.

295

tab

select DGPS mode:

• Beacon mode

• Input level

• BoB receiver battery level

cted to the BoB receiver to viewB and GeoExplorer 3 in a

More...


DGPS modes / Status / m / DGPS mode

To display the Status tab in the DGPS mode, press m and

In DGPS mode, the Status tab displays information about:

• DGPS status • Frequency

• SNR • Error rate

• Last RTCM • Beacon state

• Filter applied

Use this screen when connethe real-time status of the Botext-based format.

296

tab

al-time corrected positions.

WBFFT – When ther real-time corrections, one ofs. Each value describes the

nel. Locked indicates that

a radio source rather than the

ating real-time corrected

gh satellites to compute GPS

satellites is too poor.

OK or None, the other fields

More...


Field DescriptionDGPS status Whether the GeoExplorer 3 is receiving re

There are five states:

• Locked / Tracking / Searching / Idle /GeoExplorer 3 uses the BoB receiver fothese values appears in the DGPS statustatus of the BoB receiver primary chancorrections are being received.

• RTCM OK –The GeoExplorer 3 is usingBoB receiver for real-time corrections.

• None – The GeoExplorer 3 is not generpositions.

• Too few satellites – There are not enoupositions.

• Poor geometry – The geometry of the

NOTE When the DGPS status is RTCMshow N/A.

297

tab

is being tracked/locked onto.3.5 kHz and 325 kHz.ode it will track the best

uencies if its current frequency

mode it will track oneency unless you alter the

cibels (dB), of the differential6.0 indicates that the signal is

umber of RTCM words withtion. An error rate of below 0.1

field, measured in decibels. An input level betweenble.

More...


Frequency The current frequency of the satellite thatThe available frequencies are between 28

Beacon mode Best – when the BoB receiver is in Best mfrequency that it can, and will change freqbecomes unsatisfactory.Fixed – when the BoB receiver is in Fixedfrequency and will not alter from this frequfrequency manually on the BoB receiver.

SNR The signal-to-noise ratio, measured in deGPS beacon frequency. An SNR of aboveusable.

Error rate The RTCM Word Error Rate. This is the nparity errors, expressed as a decimal fracis acceptable.

Input level The intensity level of the electro-magneticabove one microvolt per meter (dBµ V/M)10 dBµ V/M and 100 dBµ V/M is accepta

Field Description

298

tab

lds will appear as N/A.

seconds) since the lastExplorer 3. By default, theer correction values yield

BoB receiver. Possibleonitored. The BoB receiverth a healthy signal.ys the remaining batterya percentage.a filter has been applied to the


NOTE If the BoB receiver is not the real-time source then these fie

Last RTCM The Last RTCM field indicates the time (inRTCM message was received by the GeoRTCM age limit is set to 50 seconds. Newgreater precisions than older values.

Beacon state The health of the signal received from thesettings are Healthy, Unhealthy, and Unmcan be configured to use only beacons wi

BoB receiverbattery level

The BoB receiver battery level field displapower of the BoB receiver, expressed as

Filter applied The Filter applied field indicates whetherfrequency list on the BoB receiver.

Field Description

299

ab

tive. The Select screen appears:

• Feature settings

ate and edit data dictionaries,to edit the configuration. You

xplorer 3 data collectionfaults and find out about the

ght it and pressE.

the Re-lock option.

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup t

14141414 The Setup tabThe Setup tabThe Setup tabThe Setup tabs / Setup

To display the Setup tab, press s until the Setup tab is ac

The buttons are:

• Configurations • Data dictionaries

• About • Reset

Use the Setup tab to creedit feature settings, andcan also reset the GeoEsystem to the factory deunit.

To select a button, highli

Pressm to display

300

ab

ets the parameters thatunicated to external devices.

on screen appears.


Configurationss / Setup / Configurations

Select the Configurations button to edit the configuration. This sdetermine how data is collected, entered, displayed, and comm

Select Configurations from the Setup tab. The Edit configurati

301

ab

iguration form appears:

• Real-time

• Formats

a configuration form to viewsome critical configurations

r example, GPS is a criticalo set non-criticalapplication or preferences.

Edit configuration screen.


Edit configurations / Setup / Configurations

The Edit configuration screen displays configuration buttons:

When you select a configuration button, the corresponding conf

• Data • GPS

• Coordinates • Units

• COMMS • Other

Use this screen to selector edit. You can configurebefore collecting data. Foconfiguration. You can alsconfigurations to suit your

Press e to close the

302

ab

ata form appears:

• Log velocities

• Warning distance

gure how the data is collected.

e GeoExplorer 3 pops up aor prompts you to enter data.

Data form.

More...


Datas / Setup / Configurations / Data

Select the Data button from the Edit configuration screen. The D

These fields are available in the Data form:

• Log between features • Log PPRT data

• Antenna height • Allow GPS update

• Filename prefix

Use the Data form to confi

When you select a field, thlist of entries for that field,


303

ab

Default valuePS positionsovides a traildatas is a

rval in time or

ata collectionnless apositionsrefer to.

be referredin the GPSother Trimble

Off

More...


Use this field … to …Log betweenfeatures

specify a logging interval for recording Gwhen you are between features. This prthat shows where you travelled during acollection session. (Log between featureNumeric entry field. Set the logging intedistance units.)

NOTE By default, the GeoExplorer 3 dsystem does not log positions ufeature is selected. To log GPSwhen a feature is not selected,Advanced datalogging optionsPositions between features mayto as “Not in feature” positionsPathfinder Office software anddatalogging software.

304

ab

s real-timestprocessns from ayou need tong real-timehe real-time

differentialthe office.

r accuracy.

NoDefault value

More...


Log PPRT data log the extra data needed to postprocesdata when you return to the office. To poreal-time data using differential correctiosource other than that used in the field,log extra information. This postprocessi(PPRT) information is used to prepare tdata for postprocessing. Then, using thecorrections, the data is postprocessed inThe PPRT data can provide even greateThe items in the Pop-up list are:

• Yes

• No

Use this field … to …

305

ab

a. Logdata inthese areo eliminate

No

enna heightthe featureumeric entry

1.00 m

Default value

More...


Log velocities select whether or not to log velocity datvelocities when you are collecting GPSmultipath conditions. Back in the office,then used during differential correction tthe effects of multipath.The items in the pop-up list are:

• Yes

• NoAntenna height enter the height of the antenna. The ant

is the height of the GPS antenna aboveyou are collecting. Antenna height is a Nfield.


306

ab

n be updatedare:

e you can loglaces theature.

you cannoton stored for, but not the

Yes

e originalthis distanceample, au try to log

5 m away, a warningtry field.

Always warn

Default value

More...


Allow GPSupdate

specify whether or not positional data ca(replaced). The items in the Pop-up list

• Yes – When you are updating a featurnew GPS positions. This new data reppositional information stored for the fe

• No – When you are updating a featureupdate (replace) the position informatithat feature. You can update attributesposition(s).

Warningdistance

specify the warning distance between thfeature and your current position. Whenis exceeded, a warning appears. For exwarning distance of 5 m means that if yoGPS positions when you are more thanfrom the existing position for the featuremessage appears. This is a Numeric en


307

ab

you record.hthe file namee it was

iles. Thealways “B”.

RDefault value


Filename prefix specify a single letter to identify the filesThis is the first letter of the name of eacautomatically generated file. The rest ofis generated using the date and UTC timcreated. This is a Text entry field.

NOTE This field does not affect base ffilename prefix for base files is


308

ab

PS slider bar appears:

ghted cell represents the current

ation changes accordingly. Asas a filter that accepts positions

etting is adjusted.

slider bar to configure thelity) required for GPS positions.isplay the GPS slider bar inde.

to close the GPS slider bar.

More...


GPSs / Setup / Configurations / GPSSelect the GPS button from the Edit configuration screen. The G

The GPS slider bar has nine settings from Low to High. A highlisetting.

To change the GPS slider bar setting, press 2 or 4. The animyou move the setting from High to Low, the GPS slider bar actsthat are less precise.

NOTE A change to the GPS slider bar takes effect as soon as the s

Slider

Animated

9

1Use the GPSprecision (quaYou can also dAdvanced mo

Presse

bar

symbol

Currentsetting

309

ab

r 3 data collection system filtersel of quality. Use a high setting

l of quality is lower. Thetting to collect more positions,

tree canopy can obstruct yours to be recorded. Some positionsmeans that there are fewer gapsof the positions collected is high,e to map the entire area.

sents the current GPS slider bares to indicate that the tolerance

t you configure the slider bar to

flashes to warn that the satellitellite geometry. Alternatively, stayadjust the GPS slider bar.


When the GPS precision is set to a high value, the GeoExploreout, and will not use, positions that do not meet the specified levwhen a project requires high precision.

When the GPS precision is set to a low value, the specified leveGeoExplorer 3 does not filter as many positions. Use a lower seincluding those that are slightly less precise.

If you are working on a project in a forest area, for example, theview of the sky. Adjust the GPS slider bar to allow more positionmay be of a lower quality, but the increased number of positionsin the data collected. If the setting is too high, and the precisionpositions may not be collected as often and you may not be abl

At the bottom of the screen is an animation that graphically represetting. As the setting moves from High to Low, the circle enlargfor accepting positions lessens.

NOTE This GPS setting is a critical parameter so it is important thasuit the environment.

TIP If you are collecting data and the satellite icon in the Status bargeometry is bad, try changing your position to improve the satewhere you are and wait for the satellite geometry to improve, or

310

ab

and select Advanced mode.

GPS fields instead of an

• Elevation mask

ider bar to configure ther quality required for GPS

Custom check box to use theption.

to change back to Standard

More...


Advanced mode

s / Setup / Configurations / GPS / mTo display the Advanced mode of the GPS slider bar, press m

Advanced mode is similar to Standard mode, but it displays theanimation. The following fields are shown:

• PDOP mask • SNR mask

• Minimum satellites • 2D altitude

Use the slprecision opositions.

Select theCustom o

Pressmmode.

9

15

Currentsetting

Customcheck box

GPSform

311

ab

this setting, the GPS fieldsar acts as a filter that accepts

ation mask, Minimum satellites,s:

ge a setting in one, this iss the same in the two modes.

Minimumsatellites

2D altitude

4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A4 N/A


To change the slider bar setting, press2 or 4. As you changechange accordingly. As you move from High to Low, the slider bmore or less precise positions.

Each position on the slider bar has a specific PDOP, SNR, Elevand 2D altitude associated with it. This table shows these value

NOTE The Standard and Advanced modes are related. If you chanreflected in the other. The position on the slider bar is alway

Position onslider bar

PDOP mask SNR mask Elevationmask

1 (far left) 20 2 52 12 2.5 103 8 3 124 7 3.5 145 (default) 6 4 156 5.5 4.5 157 5 5 158 4.5 5.5 159 (far right) 4 6 15

312

ab

til the Custom check box is

ove between fields in the GPSte Data entry field appears.

cannot change the mode when

check box is selected, use theigure the parameters that affecte GPS positions.

More...


Custom option

To display the Custom option of the GPS slider bar, press4 unhighlighted.

When the Custom check box is selected, press 1 or5 to mform. To edit a field, select it, and press E. The appropria

Press e to close the Advanced/Custom GPS form.

NOTE The custom option is only available in Advanced mode. Youthe Custom check box is selected.

When the CustomGPS form to confthe precision of th

Customcheck box

GPSform

313

ab

ask, the change is reflected onm level mark on the positionum level mark on the signal

e inner circle on the skyplot.

• Elevation mask

More...


NOTE When you adjust the PDOP mask, SNR mask, or elevation mThe GPS tab. The PDOP mask is represented by the minimuquality indicator. The SNR mask is represented by the minimstrength bar graph. The elevation mask is represented by th

These fields are available in the GPS form:

• PDOP mask • SNR mask

• Minimum satellites • 2D altitude

314

ab

Defaultvalue

s this value as anogram a desiredt any positionsP goes above thispositions and the

a Numeric entry

log more positions,usly degraded. It isrimble’s missionhigh PDOP, than to

accuracy of theuring these times.k too far below the

he number of GPSng the precision.

6.0

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

PDOPmask

specify a PDOP mask. The GeoExplorer 3 useupper limit to the PDOP value. This lets you prlevel of positional accuracy, and make sure thalogged are of a certain precision. When the PDOmask, the GeoExplorer 3 stops computing GPSsatellite icon appears in the Status bar. This isfield.

CAUTION Increasing the PDOP mask lets youbut the quality of these positions may be seriobetter to retain a lower PDOP mask and use Tplanning software to identify the brief times ofcontinue collecting data and compromise thepositions collected. Schedule other activities dConversely, you should not set the PDOP masdefault. A low setting significantly decreases tfeature positions, without significantly increasi

315

ab

ask). This value isof each satellite isS receiver. If amask, it is not usedield.o, see SNR.

oExplorer 3 dataignals. This maye the GPS signal isce GPS precision.

4.0

Defaultvalue

More...


SNRmask

specify the signal-to-noise ratio mask (or SNR mused to determine whether the signal strengthsufficient for that satellite to be used by the GPsatellite’s SNR is beneath the configured SNRto compute positions. This is a Numeric entry fFor more information about signal-to-noise rati

CAUTION If you lower the SNR mask, the Gecollection system uses satellites with weaker sincrease GPS coverage in environments wherweakened (such as in forests), but it may redu

Use thisfield …

to …

316

ab

can only useky to compute GPS

r than 15°, givener the elevationnoise associated

ny improvement ineffects ofre used.

for a rover is sete base stationle to each rover. Asce between themes more critical

humb, the differencethe base and the

15°

Defaultvalue

More...


Elevationmask

specify the elevation mask. The GeoExplorer 3satellites above the specified elevation in the spositions. This is a Numeric entry field.You rarely need to use an elevation mask lowethe number of satellites in service. If you do lowmask, be aware that the increased ionosphericwith satellites low on the horizon will counter aPDOP given by the lower elevation mask. Theionospheric noise increase as lower satellites a

CAUTION Make sure that the elevation maskhigher than that for the base station, so that thalways tracks the same satellites that are visiba rover gets further from the base, the differenelevation mask of the rover and the base becodue to the curvature of the earth. As a rule of tmust be at least 1° for every 100 km betweenrover.

Use thisfield …

to …

317

ab

to compute

s poor and you canlipsoid veryta collection systemwhen it is able to,

to three, it continuesen there are only

onal position, andrucially affected by

e the GeoExplorer 3ition, or the altitude

.tellites to 3, andcant impact on theollection system. Asude you supply ishe horizontalollection system.

4

Defaultvalue

More...


Minimumsatellites

specify the minimum number of satellites usedpositions. The items in the Pop-up list are:

• 3 – Use this configuration if satellite visibility idetermine your altitude above the WGS-84 elaccurately at all times. The GeoExplorer 3 dauses four satellites to compute GPS positionsbut when the number of visible satellites fallsto compute positions. A position computed whthree usable satellites is called a two-dimensithe accuracy of two-dimensional positions is cthe accuracy of the altitude. You can configurto use the altitude of the last available 3D posthat you have entered in the 2D altitude field

CAUTION If you set the minimum number of saspecify an inaccurate altitude, this has a signifiposition computed by the GeoExplorer 3 data ca rule of thumb, every meter of error in the altitlikely to cause at least three meters of error in tposition computed by the GeoExplorer 3 data c

Use thisfield …

to …

318

ab

vel of accuracy forlection system usesto computemost accurate GPSfour satellites are

positions with an

r phase datasatellites as it canositions are logged

le. This ensures thatsolution. Thisositions.

entally affects thehen you fullychanges.

Defaultvalue

More...


• 4 – Use this configuration to achieve a high lelogged positions. The GeoExplorer 3 data colas many satellites as it can (but at least four)positions. This configuration usually yields thepositions and is the most flexible. If more thanavailable, the GeoExplorer 3 computes GPSoverdetermined solution.

• 5 – Use this configuration when doing Carriecollection. The GeoExplorer 3 uses as manyto compute positions. With this setting, GPS ponly if there are at least five satellites availaball logged positions have an overdeterminedconfiguration yields the most accurate GPS p

CAUTION The Minimum satellites field fundamoperation of the GPS receiver. Only modify it wunderstand the consequences of any proposed

Use thisfield …

to …

319

ab

xplorer 3 automatically uses

. You can manuallyfield, or select the

corded is shown at

de relative to the

Use last3D GPS

Defaultvalue

nly available whennumber ofonfigured to 3.nimum number ofet at 4 or 5, the 2Dtomatically set at


NOTE If the elevation mask is configured to 4° or below, the GeoE12 channels to receive GPS signals.

2Daltitude

specify the altitude to be used for 2D positionsenter the altitude value using the Numeric entryUse last 3D GPS option. The last 3D altitude rethe bottom of the screen.

NOTE It is important to specify the 2D altituconfigured Altitude reference.

Use thisfield …

to …

This field is othe minimumsatellites is cWhen the misatellites is saltitude is auN/A.

320

ab

The Real-time form appears:

• RTCM age limit

nfigure parameters for collecting

ose the Real-time form.

More...


Real-times / Setup / Configurations / Real-time

Select the Real-time button from the Edit configuration screen.

These fields are available in the Real-time form:

• Mode • Velocity filter

• Station ID

Use this form to codata using RTCM.

Press e to cl

321

ab

Defaultvalue

ecorded. The

positions ifwill be displayed

ve beenrecorded. Theatus bar.

Bestavailable

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Mode indicate which positions are displayed and ritems in the Pop-up list are:

• Best available – this uses RTCM correctedavailable, otherwise uncorrected positionsand recorded.

• RTCM only – only GPS positions that hacorrected in real time are displayed andreal-time position icon appears in the St

322

ab

are generated,ilter to removed positions. The

real-time.

all real-timea is set to Yes.

l-time correctedacies to positionsare unsure aboutr multipath in ads that you Logfor use in theal Correctionr to the GPS

Off

Defaultvalue

More...


Velocity filter smooth real-time corrected positions as theyusing velocity information. Use the velocity fthe effects of multipath on real-time correcteitems in the pop-up list are:

• Off – velocity filtering will not be applied in

• Auto – velocity information is used to filtercorrected positions, unless Log PPRT dat

WARNING Applying the velocity filter to reapositions may introduce inaccurnot affected by multipath. If youwhether or not you will encountefield session, Trimble recommenPPRT data and Log velocitiesGPS Pathfinder Office Differentiutility. For more information, refePathfinder Office Help.

Use thisfield …

to …

323

ab

for which thection (based onnew GPScorrections arent correction is

ected positions.sing thel-time link is

50 s

Defaultvalue

More...


RTCM agelimit

specify the RTCM age limit. This is the timereceiver continues to apply a projected correthe most recent correction received) to eachposition that it computes. If no new real-timereceived in the specified time, the most receconsidered too old to provide accurate, corrWhen this occurs, the GPS receiver stops ucorrections, and you are warned that the realost. Items in the Pop-up list are:

Use thisfield …

to …

• 5 s

• 10 s

• 15 s

• 20 s

• 25 s

• 50 s

• 100 s

• 250 s

324

ab

must be ar identifies theta collection

tion. By default,TCM stationstation). This is

Any

Defaultvalue


Station ID enter a specific RTCM base station ID. Thisnumber between 0 and 1023. The ID numbeRTCM station and lets the GeoExplorer 3 dasystem locate and use a particular base stathe receiver attempts to choose the “best” R(based typically on the distance to the basea Numeric entry field or you can select Any.

Use thisfield …

to …

325

ab

. The Coordinates form appears:

• Datum

• Coordinate units

nfigure parameters that affected and displayed. Specify aion and a map projection to seeand the position of the featuresplayed, in your local coordinates it easy to check your positionmap produced by your GIS.

lose the Coordinates form.

More...


Coordinatess / Setup / Configurations / Coordinates

Select the Coordinates button from the Edit configuration screen

These fields are available in the Coordinates form:

• System • Zone

• Altitude reference • Geoid

• Altitude units

Use this form to cohow data is collectdatum transformatthe GPS position,that you collect dissystem. This makeor navigate using a

Presse to c

326

ab

Defaultvalue

n entering andlay a list of

eoExplorer 3

s to theSystem Managerthe GPS

ransfer coordinateto the

te systems, pressinformation, see

Latitude/Longitude

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

System specify the coordinate system to be used whedisplaying coordinates. Select this field to dispcoordinate systems currently loaded on the Ghandheld. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• Latitude/Longitude

• Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)

NOTE To transfer other Coordinate systemGeoExplorer 3, use the Coordinateutility. For more information, refer toPathfinder Office Help. You cannot tsystems from GPS Pathfinder OfficeGeoExplorer 3c edition.

NOTE To reset the list of available coordinam and select Reset. For moreResetting coordinate systems.

327

ab

n calculatingnes that apply tos field. If only oneystem, this field is

N/A

o be used whenected system and

WGS1984

entering andlist are:

MSL

Defaultvalue

More...


Zone specify the zone (if applicable) to be used whecoordinates. Select this field to display the zothe coordinate system selected in the previouzone is available for the selected coordinate sread-only.

Datum view (and in some cases specify) the datum tcalculating coordinates. Depending on the selzone, this field may be read-only.

Altitudereference

specify the altitude reference to be used whendisplaying altitude values. Items in the Pop-up

• Mean Sea Level (MSL)

• HAE (Height above ellipsoid)

Use thisfield …

to …

328

ab

ting the heightble when thed must beconfigured as then transferring theen creating aSystem ManagerPathfinder Office

Global) model.nsfer

ighlight the geoidhe Delete option.figurations usingA 10x10 geoid.

Global) geoid or a

DMA10x10(Global)

Defaultvalue

More...


Geoid specify the geoid model to be used for calculaabove mean sea level. This field is only availaselected altitude reference is MSL. Each geoireferenced to a coordinate system for it to becurrent geoid. To do this, specify the geoid whecoordinate system to the GeoExplorer 3 or whcoordinate system export file in the Coordinateutility. (For more information, refer to the GPSHelp.) The supplied geoid is the DMA 10x10 (Use the GPS Pathfinder Office software to traother geoids to the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

To delete a geoid, select the Geoid field and hyou want to delete. Press m and select tYou are prompted to confirm the deletion. Conthis geoid return to the default setting, the DM

NOTE You cannot delete the DMA 10x10 (geoid that is currently in use.

Use thisfield …

to …

329

ab

s are configured.

er Office software and aplayed by default. If you do not

isplayingther thane:

N/A

isplaying altitude Meters

Defaultvalue

y Ft (sf)

Meters (NAm)


NOTE Some fields will display N/A, depending on how related field

NOTE When you transfer a configuration file from the GPS Pathfindcoordinate system is specified, that coordinate system is distransfer the appropriate files, system defaults are displayed.

Coordinateunits

specify the units to be used for entering and dcoordinates when using a coordinate system oLatitude/Longitude. Items in the Pop-up list ar

Altitudeunits

specify the units to be used for entering and dunits. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• Meters (m)

• Feet (ft)

Use thisfield …

to …

• Meters (m)

• Feet (ft)

• Yards (yd)

• US Surve

• Namibian

330

ab

Units form appears:

• Velocity

• Declination

units are to be entered and

its form.

More...


Unitss / Setup / Configurations / Units

Select the Units button from the Edit configuration screen. The

These fields are available in the Units form:

• Distance • Area

• Angle • North reference

Use this form to configure howdisplayed.

Press e to close the Un

331

ab

Default value

ndt are:

Meters

nd Square meters

es (nm)

eters (km2)

s (mi2)

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Distance specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying distances. Items in the Pop-up lis

Area specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying area. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• Meters (m)

• Feet (ft)

• Kilometers (km)

• Miles (mi)

• Nautical Mil

• Square meters (m2)

• Square feet (ft2)

• Hectares (Ha)

• Acres (A)

• Square kilom

• Square mile

332

ab

ndare:

Km/Hour

Default value

mph)

More...


Velocity specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying velocity. Items in the Pop-up list

Use thisfield …

to …

• Meters/Second (m/s)

• Feet/Second (ft/s)

• Km/Hour (kph)

• Miles/Hour (

• Knots (kt)

333

ab

ndp list are:

yed wheny do not

d mode

longitudeslayed in

/or

Degrees

Default value

)

More...


Angle specify the units to be used when entering adisplaying bearing angles. Items in the Pop-u

NOTE Angle units only affect angles displanavigating and entering offsets. Theaffect:

• the bearings shown in the Advancescreen of the GPS tab.

• the entry or display of latitudes and(which are always entered and dispdegrees with optional minutes andseconds).

Use thisfield …

to …

• Degrees (°)

• Gradians (gon)

• Rhumbs (rh

• Mils (mil)

334

ab

ive toop-up list

background

ompass to

True

a, which iseric entry

significant

lination, oroExplorer 3declination

Auto

Default value


Northreference

specify whether bearings are displayed relattrue north or magnetic north. Items in the Pare:

• True – useful when navigating relative to amap.

• Magnetic – useful when using a magnetic cnavigate.

Declination specify the magnetic declination for your areprinted on most accurate maps. This is a numfield, or you can select Auto.Items in the pop-up list are:

• Value – enter the declination. If you move adistance, it may be necessary to update thedeclination.

• Auto – if you do not know the magnetic decprefer not to update it as you move, the Geuses an internal database to determine thebased on your current position.

Use thisfield …

to …

335

ab

he Formats form appears:

• Degrees

• Time zone

parameters that affect theplay data.

rmats form.

More...


Formatss / Setup / Configurations / Formats

Select the Formats button from the Edit configuration screen. T

These fields are available in the Formats form:

• Language • Offset

• Date • Time

• Coordinate order

Use this form to configure theformats used to enter and dis

Presse to close the Fo

336

ab

Default value

ith. AExplorer 3.Trimble Web

English

offsets. Horz/Vert

angles thates). Items in

DD°MM'SS.ss"

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Language specify the language that you want to work wnumber of languages are loaded on the GeoAdditional languages are available from thesite (www.trimble.com).

Offset specify the format to be used when enteringItems in the Pop-up list are:

• Horz/Vert – horizontal and vertical distance

• Slope/Incl – slope distance and inclinationDegrees specify the format to be used when entering

use degrees (including latitudes and longitudthe Pop-up list are:• DD°MM'SS.ss"

• DD°MM.mmm

• DD°.ddd

http://www.trimble.com

337

ab

g the local-up list are:

MM/DD/YYYY

g the local-up list are:

12 hour

Default value

D

More...


Date specify the format to be used when displayindate in the Time zone field. Items in the Pop

Time specify the format to be used when displayintime in the Time zone field. Items in the Pop

• 12 hour

• 24 hour

Use thisfield …

to …

• DD/MM/YYYY

• MM/DD/YYYY

• YYYY/MM/D

338

ab

Explorer 3try field.

00:00

a position’s Lat/Long(North/East)

Default value

one byalue to

rrect local


Time zone specify the time zone to be used by the Geodata collection system. This is a Numeric en

Coordinateorder

specify the order to be used when displayingcoordinates. Items in the Pop-up list are:

Use thisfield …

to …

Set the time zadjusting the vdisplay the cotime and date.

• Lat/Long

• Long/Lat

• North/East

• East/North

339

ab

he COMMS form appears:

• NMEA output

• Data bits

eters for communication witht data transfer to and from anication with radios whenor NMEA output messages.

MMS form.

More...


COMMSs / Setup / Configurations / COMMSSelect the COMMS button from the Edit configuration screen. T

These fields are available in the COMMS form:

• Data transfer • RTCM input

Port settings:

• Input baud rate • Output baud rate

• Stop bits • Parity

Use this form to set the paramexternal devices. These affecoffice computer, and communreceiving real-time corrections

Press e to close the CO

340

ab

Default value

xplorer 3 toe:

be placed inta transfer to

d to the rearcomputerto occur.

disabled.

et to theCM input or

Supportmodule

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Datatransfer

specify the device used to connect the GeoEthe office computer. Items in the Pop-up list ar

• Support module – the GeoExplorer 3 mustthe GeoExplorer 3 support module for dathe office computer to occur.

• Serial clip – the Serial clip must be attacheof the GeoExplorer 3 and connected to theusing a null modem cable for data transfer

• Off – data transfer to the office computer is

NOTE The Data transfer field cannot be ssame value as configured in the RTNMEA output fields (except Off).

341

ab

e RTCM

t to the samecept Off).

e optionalEA output

Cable-freeBoBorSerial clip (withGeoExplorer 3cedition)

Default value

More...


RTCM input specify the connection device used to receivmessages. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• Cable-free BoB

NOTE This option is not available with theGeoExplorer 3c edition.

• Support module

• Serial clip

• Off

NOTE The RTCM input field cannot be sevalue as the Data transfer field (ex

NOTE When using RTCM input without thRTCM/NMEA splitter cable, the NMmust be set to Off.

Use thisfield …

to …

342

ab

NMEA

et to theld (except

the optionalCM inputB.

Off

Default value

More...


NMEAoutput

specify the connection device used to outputmessages. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• Support module

• Serial clip

• Off

NOTE The NMEA output field cannot be ssame value as the Data transfer fieOff).

NOTE When using NMEA output withoutRTCM/NMEA splitter cable, the RTmust be set to Off or Cable-free Bo

Use thisfield …

to …

343

ab

Items in the 2400

Items in the 2400

Default value

More...


Input baudrate

specify the baud rate for input of RTCM data.pop-up list are:

Output baudrate

specify the baud rate for output NMEA data.Pop-up list are:

Use thisfield …

to …

• 110

• 300

• 600

• 1200

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600

• 19200

• 38400

• 110

• 300

• 600

• 1200

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600

• 19200

• 38400

344

ab

fer data.ent in amit org a singlet and data

8

te the end ofransferred.ent in a

a byte and aThis field iss in the

1

Default value

More...


Data bits specify the number of data bits used to transWhen data is transferred, each character is sstream of single bits, but many devices transreceive fewer than eight bits when transferrincharacter. This field is the same for data inpuoutput. Items in the pop-up list are:

• 7

• 8Stop bits specify the number of stop bits used to indica

a byte. Stop bits are part of the data that is tWhen data is transferred, each character is sstream of single bits. There are eight bits instop bit is used to indicate the end of a byte.the same for data input and data output. ItemPop-up list are:

• 1

• 2

Use thisfield …

to …

345

ab

ata ishe same

device.output.

None

Default value


Parity specify the parity used when binary digital dtransferred. For most data transfers, select tparity as is set in the external communicationThis field is the same for data input and dataItems in the pop-up list are:

Use thisfield …

to …

• None

• Even

• Odd

346

ab

Other form appears:

rameters for the beep volume,plorer 3 data collection systems.

Other form.

More...


Others / Setup / Configurations / Other

Select the Other button from the Edit configuration screen. The

These fields are available in the Other form:

• Beep volume • NMEA output interval

NMEA messages:

• GGA • VTG

Use this form to set the paand to configure the GeoExfor NMEA output message


347

ab

Default value

emits a

e the

On

essages are 5 s

utput in the:

Yes

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Beepvolume

specify whether the GeoExplorer 3 handheldbeep. Items in the Pop-up list are:

• On – any warnings or position logging causGeoExplorer 3 to beep.

• Off – the GeoExplorer 3 does not beep.NMEAoutputinterval

specify the output interval at which NMEA mtransmitted. This is a Numeric entry field.

GGA specify if the GGA message string is to be oNMEA message. Items in the pop-up list are

• Yes

• No

348

ab

tput in the:

Yes

Default value


VTG specify if the VTG message string is to be ouNMEA message. Items in the Pop-up list are

• Yes

• No

Use thisfield …

to …

349

ab

ne. You can create new dataer 3 data collection system in thete or edit a data dictionary.

tionary list appears:

reated. The most recently

onary, select it from the list. Theppears.

elect data dictionary list.

advanced Data dictionaries


Data dictionariess / Setup / Data dictionaries

Use this list to edit an existing data dictionary or create a new odictionaries that are specific to different jobs. Use the GeoExplorfield, or the GPS Pathfinder Office software in the office, to crea

Select Data dictionaries from the Setup tab. The Select data dic

NOTE Data dictionaries are listed in the order in which they were ccreated file is at the bottom of the list.

To edit an existing data dictiEdit data dictionary form a

Presse to close the S

Pressm to display theoption list.

350

ab

ailable options.

• Rename

More...


Data dictionaries option lists / Setup / Data dictionaries / mPress m from the Select data dictionary list to view the av

The options are:

• New • Copy

• Delete

351

ab

u select this option, thedisplays a Text entry field.ary. Press e to save thery form.ata dictionary to be copied.eoExplorer 3 displays a textchange it. The default name

to save the name and

ictionary. Highlight the dataand select Rename. A text

of the data dictionary. Press

ions do not appear if Genericcannot rename or delete the

More...


Use this option … to …New create a new data dictionary. When yo

GeoExplorer 3 data collection systemEnter the name of the new data dictionname and go to the Edit data dictiona

Copy copy a data dictionary. Highlight the dPress m and select Copy. The Gentry field. Accept the default name oris Copy of <Data dictionary>. Press ego to the Edit data dictionary form.

Rename change the name of an existing data ddictionary to be renamed. Press mentry field appears. Change the namee to save the new name.

NOTE The Rename and Delete optis highlighted in the list. Yougeneric data dictionary.

352

ab

g message appears. You.

data dictionary to be deleted.are prompted to confirm

tionary that is in use, or hasrrently stored on the


NOTE If the dictionary name that you enter already exists, a warnincannot create multiple data dictionaries with the same name

Delete delete a data dictionary. Highlight thePress m and select Delete. Youdeletion.

NOTE You cannot delete a data dicbeen used by a file that is cuGeoExplorer 3.

Use this option … to …

353

ab

name>

the GeoExplorer 3. The Editand values contained in the

tion about adding or editing thes in the selected data dictionary.

it data dictionary form and saveto close the Edit data

any changes.

it data dictionary option list.

ect it. A Text entry field appears.ment field is for reference only

propriate attribute entry form or

d dictionary, but not delete ortion, see Dictionary.


Edit data dictionarys / Setup / Data dictionaries / <Data dictionary

Select a data dictionary from the list of available dictionaries ondata dictionary form displays the comment, features, attributes,selected data dictionary.

Use this form to view informafeatures, attributes, and value

Press e to close the Edany changes. Press fedictionary form and abandon

Press m to view the Ed

To edit the Comment field, selEnter your comment. The Comand it is optional.

To edit a feature, attribute, or value select it from the list. The apPop-up list appears. Enter the changes.

NOTE If a data file is open, you can add to the end of its associatechange any features, attributes, or values. For more informa

354

ab

name> / mailable options. The options that

ictionary form.

• Show values

• Add value

More...


Edit data dictionary option lists / Setup / Data dictionaries / <Data dictionary

From the Edit data dictionary form, press m to view the avappear depend on what is currently displayed in the Edit data d

The options are:

• Show features • Show attributes

• Add feature • Add attribute

• Copy • Delete

355

ab

ccur in the selected dataributes or values are currentlys and values, and display only

ary, Show features is the

and theirding type

More...


Use thisoption …

to …

Showfeatures

display the features and feature types that odictionary. This option is only available if attdisplayed. Select this option to hide attributefeatures and feature types.

NOTE When you first open a data dictiondefault option.

Featurescorrespon

356

ab

s, and attribute typesindented to show which

orresponding type

corresponding typefeature

More...


Showattributes

display the features, feature types, attributeassociated with each feature. Attributes arefeature they belong to.

Use thisoption …

to …

Feature and c

Attributes andfor the above

357

ab

ibute. Values are indented to

When you select this option aWhen a new feature is

the suffix is a digit numberample, New1, then New2, andry field appears. By default,e type, select it. A Pop-up list

orresponding typecorresponding type

menu attribute

minimumumeric attribute

More...


Show values display the values associated with each attrshow which attribute they belong to.

Add feature add a feature to the current data dictionary.feature is added below the selected feature.created, the prefix for the name is New and(starting at 1 for the first one created), for exso on. To edit the name, select it. A Text entthe new feature is a point. To edit the featurappears.

Use thisoption …

to …

Feature and cAttribute and

Values for the

Maximum andrange for the n

358

ab

y. This option is only availablelect this option, an attribute isnew attribute is created, thedigit number (starting at 1 for

en New2, and so on. To edits. By default, the new attributetype, select it. A Pop-up list

a list of values. To set a menuE . Only one value can be

More...


Add attribute add an attribute to the current data dictionarwhen attributes are displayed. When you seadded below the selected attribute. When aprefix for the name is New and the suffix is athe first one created), for example, New1, ththe name, select it. A Text entry field appearis a text entry attribute. To edit the attributeappears. The attribute types are:

• Menu – use the Add value option to createvalue as the default, highlight it and pressset as the default.

Use thisoption …

to …

359

ab

e the numeric attribute. Selecthow values from the option list

on form appears:

form to specify the type of fieldcreation and on update, the

m and minimum default values,number of decimal places foreric attribute.

More...


Add attribute(continued)

• Numeric – use the Definition form to definthe value field and pressm. Select Sand then select the value field.The Definiti

Use thisoption …

to …

Use thisentry onmaximuand thethe num

360

ab

text attribute. Select the <-no.->y the type of field entry and the

Date attribute. Select theion form appears. Specify thes, and the format.

e Time attribute. Select theappears. Specify the type of

generate options.

tate or create a break in the list, and you cannot enter a value

is only available when valuesa value is added below the, the prefix for the name isat 1 for the first one created),

e value, select it. The

More...


Add attribute(continued)

• Text – use the Definition form to define thevalue. The Definition form appears. Specifmaximum number of characters allowed.

• Date – use the Definition form to define theDD/MM/YYYY (Manual) value. The Definittype of field entry, the auto generate option

• Time – use the Definition form to define th12 hour (Manual) value. The Definition formfield entry, the 24 hour option, and the auto

• Separator – use this attribute type to annoof attributes. A separator is not an attributefor it.

Add value add a value to a menu attribute. This optionare displayed. When you select this option,selected value. When a new value is createdNew and the suffix is a digit number (startinge.g. New1, then New2, and so on. To edit thappropriate field appears.

Use thisoption …

to …

361

ab

the feature, attribute, or valuelect Copy. The new feature,he appropriate list. The default.the feature, attribute, or valueou are prompted to confirm

ionary any features, attributes,s on the GeoExplorer 3.


Copy copy a feature, attribute, or value. Highlightthat you want to copy. Press m and seattribute, or value appears at the bottom of tname is Copy of <feature / attribute / value>

Delete delete a feature, attribute, or value. Highlightto delete. Press m and select Delete. Ythe deletion.

NOTE You cannot delete from a data dictor values that are used by data file

Use thisoption …

to …

362

ab

tting or to create a new one. Useical parameters, so configuree settings list to configure carrier

ettings list appears:

ionaries currently stored in theature settings for a dataist. The Edit feature settings

elect feature settings list.


Feature settingss / Setup / Feature settings

Use the Select feature settings list to edit an existing feature seit to set logging intervals and minimum positions. These are critthem to suit your application. You can also use the Select featurphase data collection and offsets.

Select Feature settings from the Setup tab. The Select feature s

This list reflects the data dictGeoExplorer 3. To edit the fedictionary, select it from the lform appears.

Press e to close the S

363

ab

ettings

logging interval for every feature

he form that appears depends on

on about the settings for theictionary.

it feature settings list.

it feature settings option list.


Edit feature settingss / Setup / Feature settings / <Feature name> s

The Edit feature settings list displays the feature name and thein the current data dictionary.

To edit the setting for a feature, select the feature from the list. Twhat type of feature you select—point, line, or area.

• Editing point features

• Editing line and area features

Use this list to view informatifeatures in the current data d

Press e to close the Ed

Press m to view the Ed

364

ab

st, the <Feature name> settingsop of the screen.

t. This list contains one option,nt settings form.

• Accuracy

e the parameters for thearameters affect the GPSature, and the informationn when the feature is selected.

feature name> settings form.

More...


Editing point featuresWhen you select a point feature from the Edit feature settings liform appears. The name of the selected point feature is at the t

These fields are available in the <feature name> settings form:

Press m to display the <feature name> settings option lisAuto-increment. Select this option to display the Auto-increme

• Interval • Minimum positions

• Label 1 • Label 2

Use this form to set or changselected point feature. The ppositions collected for that fedisplayed in the DATA sectio

Press e to close the <

365

ab

Default value

sitions

ds, thery fivetil youan

5 s

t mustefore

er 3yn stayed.

1

More...


Use thisfield …

to …

Interval specify the interval between feature GPS powhen you are collecting a point feature. Forexample, if you set the interval to five seconGeoExplorer 3 logs GPS positions once eveseconds, from when you start the feature unend it. This is a Numeric entry field or you cselect Off.

Minimumpositions

specify the minimum number of positions thabe logged. If you try to save a point feature benough positions are logged, the GeoExplorwarns you. You can store the feature anywadespite a possible loss of precision, or you caat the feature until enough positions are loggThis is a numeric entry field.

366

ab

carrierop-up

a

Code

eeaturest areas thebel.

The first attribute ofthe feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.

Itemslectedan

The second attributeof the feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.

Default value


Accuracy specify whether you want to collect code orphase data for point features. Items in the Plist are:

• Code

• CarrierFor more information, see Carrier phase datcollection.

Label 1 specify the first feature information label to bdisplayed in The Map tab and in the Update flist in The Update tab. Items in the Pop-up lithe attributes of the selected feature, as wellvalue Off which you can select to hide this la

Label 2 specify the second feature information label.in the Pop-up list are the attributes of the sefeature, as well as the value Off which you cselect to hide this label.

Use thisfield …

to …

367

ab

tings list, the <Feature name>e top of the screen.

• Label 1

• Vert. distance

area feature parameters forrameters affect the GPS

ture. You can also use thisto specify the informationselected in the DATA section.

ature name> settings form.

More...


Editing line and area featuresWhen you select a line or area feature from the Edit feature setsettings form appears. The name of the selected feature is at th

These fields are available in the <feature name> settings form:

• Interval • Accuracy

• Label 2

Offset:

• Direction • Horz. distance

Use this form to set the line orthe selected feature. These papositions collected for that feaform to configure Offsets anddisplayed when the feature is

Presse to close the <fe

368

ab

list. This list contains one-increment settings form.

Default value

ng a

theogs

whena

5 s

carrierin the

a

Code

More...


Press m to display the <feature name> settings optionoption, Auto-increment. Select this option to display the Auto

Use thisfield …

to …

Interval specify the interval (time or distance) betweefeature GPS positions when you are collectinline or area feature. For example, if you setinterval to five seconds, the GeoExplorer 3 lGPS positions once every five seconds, fromyou start the feature until you end it. This isNumeric entry field or you can select Off.

Accuracy specify whether you want to collect code orphase data for line and area features. ItemsPop-up list are:

• Code

• CarrierFor more information, see Carrier phase datcollection.

369

ab

e. Theat thep-up

Right

area 0.00 m

a 0.00 m

eeaturest areas thebel.

The first attribute ofthe feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.

Default value

More...


OffsetDirection specify the direction to the line or area featur

direction is relative to the direction of traveltime the feature is recorded. Items in the Polist are:

• Right

• LeftHorz.distance

specify the horizontal distance to the line orfeature.

Vert.distance

specify the vertical distance to the line or arefeature.

Label 1 specify the first feature information label to bdisplayed in The Map tab and in the Update flist in The Update tab. Items in the Pop-up lithe attributes of the selected feature, as wellvalue Off which you can select to hide this la

Use thisfield …

to …

370

ab

Itemslectedan

The second attributeof the feature, or theattribute selected inthe Data DictionaryEditor utility.

Default value


Label 2 specify the second feature information label.in the Pop-up list are the attributes of the sefeature, as well as the value Off which you cselect to hide this label.

Use thisfield …

to …

371

ab

gs / <Feature> settings /

ng. When you create a newin with the next value in the

pecify in the Auto-incremente can increase or decrease, and

is within the acceptable range foran increment value of 5, the next

-incrementing attributes.

More...


Auto-increment settings forms / Setup / Feature settings / Edit feature settinm / Auto-increment

Any numeric or text attribute can be defined as auto-incrementifeature, any auto-incrementing attributes are automatically filledsequence. The new value is based on the step value that you ssettings form and the last value entered in the field. The sequencmay advance in any increment (step) value, provided this valuethe attribute. For example, if an attribute has a value of 10 andvalue automatically generated is 15.

For more information on how values are incremented, see Auto

372

ab

ressm in the <feature>

More...


To set auto-incrementing options for the selected feature type, psettings form and select Auto-increment:

373

ab

corresponding field in the formuto-incrementing, select No

crement value, select Stepeld.

GeoExplorer 3 handheld, or inftware. For more information,

form contains a field for each textmeric attribute in the feature. Ais set to No increment if it doesave automatic incrementingled, or to a positive or negativethat indicates the step by which

alues in this field increment.


The Auto-increment settings form appears

To change an attribute’s auto-increment setting, highlight theand press E. The Increment form appears. To turn off aincrement. To turn auto-incrementing on, or to change the invalue and enter a value in the Numeric entry or Text entry fi

You can set auto-incrementing values for attributes either on thethe Data Dictionary Editor utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office sorefer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

Step valueText or

Thisor nufieldnot henabvaluethe v

numericattribute

374

ab

g attribute, only numeric valuesf the last value you entered waseoExplorer 3 is 48A. However, ifomponent to increment.

ith alphabetic characters, onlyA100-K9 with a step value of 1 is

ed value if it is not acceptable.in the sequence is calculateded by the system.

next value in the sequence, theccurs when:

no default value is specified

equence is incrementing

quence is decrementing


Auto-incrementing attributes

Although you can define a text attribute as an auto-incrementinwithin the text are incremented or decremented. For example, i47A, and the step value is 1, the next value generated by the Gthe last value was A, the next is still A, as there is no numeric c

When the text consists of more than one number interspersed wthe last numeric part of the string is incremented. For example,incremented to A100-K10.

As with any other default value, you can edit an auto-incrementHowever, if you edit an auto-incremented value, the next valueusing the new value you entered, not the original value generat

If any condition prevents the GeoExplorer 3 from generating theattribute is created with a null value represented by a “?”. This o

• the feature is the first of its type to be created in this file, and

• the last value for the attribute was blank

• the last value was the maximum value in the range and the s

• the last value was the minimum value in the range and the se

375

ab

gs / milable options. Use these options

et all areas

More...


Edit feature settings option lists / Setup / Feature settings / Edit feature settin

Press m from the Edit feature settings list to view the avato make the same change to all features of a particular type.

The options are:

• Set all points • Set all lines • S

376

ab

en you select this option, thechange the settings for allt any changes and close the

and abandon any changes.n you select this option, the

hange the settings for all linechanges and close the form.

and abandon any changes.en you select this option, thehange the settings for all areachanges and close the form.

and abandon any changes.


Use this option … to set the parameters for all …Set all points point features in a data dictionary. Wh

Set all points form appears. Use it topoint features. Press e to accepform.Press fe to close the form

Set all lines line features in a data dictionary. WheSet all lines form appears. Use it to cfeatures. Press e to accept anyPress fe to close the form

Set all areas area features in a data dictionary. WhSet all areas form appears. Use it to cfeatures. Press e to accept anyPress fe to close the form

377

b

ppears:

ation about the firmware. Ittion:

• Trimble logo andcompany name

• Serial number

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceSYS section – 14: The Setup ta

Abouts / Setup / About

Select the About button from the Setup tab. The About screen a

Use this screen to view informdisplays the following informa

• Product name

• Version number andrelease date

378

ab

ts, reset the internal GPSrade. Select Reset from the

Reset receiver


Resets / Setup / Reset

Use the Reset list to reset the GeoExplorer 3 to factory defaulreceiver, or to prepare the GeoExplorer 3 for a firmware upgSetup tab. The reset list appears:

The options are:

• Factory defaults • Reset text list •

• Upgrade firmware

379

ab

appears:

s, data files, languages,GeoExplorer 3 to the default

ngitude on the WGS-84data files will be closed.

rmware to Trimble factory

the reset. If you select:

firmware resets to the factory

is cancelled.


Factory defaultss / Setup / Reset / Factory defaults

Select Factory defaults from the Reset list. The following screen

NOTE Resetting to factory defaults does not delete data dictionariecoordinate systems, or waypoints. However, it does reset thelanguage (English), the default coordinate system (latitude/lodatum), and the default data dictionary (Generic). Any open

Use this screen to reset the fidefaults.

You are prompted to confirm

• Yes – the GeoExplorer 3defaults.

• No – the reset operation

380

ab

ed for Text completion. Select

try. For more information, see

firm the reset. If you select:

completion strings is cleared.

ation is cancelled.


Reset text lists / Setup / Reset / Reset text list

Use the Reset text list option to clear the list of strings that is usReset text list from the Reset list.

NOTE You can remove individual strings from the list during text enText completion.

You are prompted to con

• Yes – the list of text

• No – the reset oper

381

ab

et receiver from the Reset list.

l GPS receiver, but, if for someroblem.

the receiver.


rer 3 receiver is reset.

ation is cancelled.

More...


Reset receivers / Setup / Reset / Reset receiver

Use the Reset receiver option to reset the receiver. Select ResThe reset receiver screen appears:

NOTE Normally it is unnecessary to reset the GeoExplorer 3 internareason the receiver malfunctions, resetting it can often fix the p

Use this screen to reset


• Yes – the GeoExplo

• No – the reset oper

382

ab

manac and perform a warm boot.als from the GPS satellites. If theree minutes, you should contact

es not affect any other files or


CAUTION Resetting the internal GPS receiver will delete the current alThe receiver may take up to three minutes to reacquire signGeoExplorer 3 fails to acquire GPS satellite signals within thyour Trimble Dealer for advice.

NOTE Although resetting the receiver deletes the almanac file, it dosettings on the GeoExplorer 3.

383

ab

e upgrade. Select Upgradeears:

figuration settings, datas.

the firmware installation


rer 3 is placed in Upgrade

e Installing the firmware.

peration is cancelled.


Upgrade firmwares / Setup / Reset / Upgrade firmware

Use the Reset list to prepare the GeoExplorer 3 for a firmwarfirmware from the Reset list. The Upgrade firmware screen app

WARNING Upgrading the firmware deletes all data files, waypoints, condictionaries, user-loaded languages, and coordinate system

Use this screen to beginprocess.


• Yes – the GeoExplomode.

For more details, se

• No – the upgrade o

DATA section – IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 384

THE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONTHE DATA SECTIONUse the DATA section to open data files, collect new data, update existing data, and view GPSdata graphically.

Press d to move between the tabs in the DATA section.

The DATA section has four tabs:

NOTE The New, Update, and Map tabs are visible only when a data file is open.

NOTE The Map tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition.

• The File tab • The New tab • The Update tab

• The Map tab

385

b

data file is open. (When a datarm appears:

current form changes to Collect

ata file or open an existing one.nd select the data dictionary that

e option list.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 15: The File ta

15151515 The File tab The File tab The File tab The File tab d / File

To display the File tab, press d .The File tab appears if nofile is open the File tab is not available.) The Collect new data fo

When the Create new file button is highlighted, the name of thenew data. Use this form to create a new data file.

Use this tab to create a new dUse it to change a filename ayou want to use.

Pressm to view the Fil

386

b

the current form changes to.

form, the Update existing data

• File

• Date

More...


The Collect new data form contains:

When the Open selected file button is highlighted, the name ofUpdate existing data. Use this form to open an existing data file

In addition to the fields that are available in the Collect new dataform contains:

• Create new file • Open selected file

• Dictionary

• File size • Time

387

b

e Create new file button isappears. When all fields in

his accepts the new File nameis created and The New tab

the Open selected file buttonta form appears. Use the Fileress E . The Update tab

he file is the data dictionarycreated.

re than seven days ago, then system will not let youof data (although you cannical limitation relates to thestored. To maintain accurateit the time-span of a data file

More...


Use this button … to …Create new file create a new rover data file. When th

highlighted, the Collect new data formthe form are correct, press E. Tand Dictionary. A new rover data fileappears.

Open selected file open a selected rover data file. Whenis highlighted, the Update existing dafield to select the file to be opened. Pappears.The data dictionary associated with tthat was selected when that file was

NOTE If a data file was created moGeoExplorer 3 data collectioreopen it for further loggingreview and edit it). This techway in which GPS times arestorage, it is necessary to limto seven days.

388

b

ile to open. When Create newhe filename.ld are highlighted, pressthe GeoExplorer 3 handheld.the list, including the number

file’s transfer status, appears

tes a filename for new files. ItH X where:

,ay.

t “A” for the first file in thaton.

only a suggestion. You caner a new name. Filenamescters long.

More...


Use this field … to …File edit the filename, or select an existing f

file is highlighted, press E to edit tWhen Open selected file and the File fieE to see a list of the files stored inStatus information for the selected file inof point, line, and area features and thebelow the list.The GeoExplorer 3 automatically generauses the following formula: R MM DD H• R is the Filename prefix,• MM is the current UTC month,• DD is the current UTC day of the month• and HH is the current UTC hour of the dX increments within this hour, starting ahour, then “B” for the second file, and so

NOTE The auto-generated filename isalter the suggested name or entmust be not more than 20 chara

389

b

ata dictionaries currentlytion system. When Createictionary is the one most

ing the GPS Pathfinder Officet the Dictionary field and press

appears.available. It lets you recorda simple descriptive attribute.nd create Data dictionaries.this field is read-only andssociated with the selected

en creating a data file ist file. It determines whichd to the file, and what

er 3, you can only add to thecannot make changes toom it.

More...


Dictionary select a data dictionary from the list of dloaded on the GeoExplorer 3 data collecnew file is highlighted, the default data drecently loaded to the GeoExplorer 3 ussoftware. To select a dictionary, highlighE. The list of available dictionariesThe “Generic” data dictionary is alwayspoint, line, and area features, each withYou can use the GeoExplorer 3 to edit aWhen Open selected file is highlighted,shows the name of the data dictionary afile.

NOTE The data dictionary selected whpermanently associated with thatypes of features can be recordeattributes the features have.

NOTE When a file is on the GeoExplorassociated data dictionary. Youexisting items, or delete items fr


390

b

d data file.ated.ated.


File size view the size, in kilobytes, of the selecteTime view the time when the file was last updDate view the date when the file was last upd


391

b

le options.

• Base station


File option listd / File / mWhen the File tab is active, press m to display the availab

The options are:

• Delete file(s) • Rename file(s)

392

b

st appears:

• Lines

• Free space

• Data dictionary

delete rover and base data files., highlight it and press E .ted to confirm the deletion.

to display the Delete all file(s)

More...


Delete file(s)d / File / m / Delete file(s)

Select Delete file(s) from the File option list. The Delete file(s) li

The Delete file(s) screen displays the following:

• List of files • Points

• Areas • Between feature GPS

• Status • File size

• Time • Date

Use this list toTo delete a fileYou are promp

Press moption.

Message box

List of roverand base files

393

b

leted or renamed. Informationthe message box. As you

yed information changes

r of point features in the

of line features in the

r of area features in the

), with the number of GPSthe selected file.KB) remaining in the

s been transferred from theo an office computer.tes (KB).ected file is associated with.

More...


Information DescriptionList of files Use this list to select the file(s) to be de

about the highlighted file is displayed inscroll through the list of files, the displaaccordingly.

Points The point symbol ( ), with the numbeselected file.

Lines The line symbol ( ), with the numberselected file.

Areas The area symbol ( ), with the numbeselected file.

Between featureGPS

The Between feature GPS symbol (positions recorded between features in

Free space The amount of free space in kilobytes (GeoExplorer 3 data collection system.

Status Indicates whether the highlighted file haGeoExplorer 3 data collection system t

File size The size of the highlighted file in kilobyData dictionary The name of the data dictionary the sel

394

b

.

.


Time The time when the file was last updatedDate The date when the file was last updated

Information Description

395

b

ll files option.

om the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.isplays a warning when your.


Delete file(s) option listd / File / m / Delete file(s) / mPress m from the Delete file(s) list to display the Delete a

Use the Delete all files option to delete all rover and base files frYou are prompted to confirm the deletion. The GeoExplorer 3 ddelete files that have not been transferred to the office compute

396

b

s) list appears:

• Lines

• Free space

• Data dictionary

rename rover and base datae a file, highlight it and pressext entry field appears,current filename.


Rename file(s)d / File / m / Rename file(s)

Select Rename file(s) from the File option list. The Rename file(

The Rename file(s) screen displays the following:

• List of files • Points

• Areas • Between feature GPS

• Status • File size

• Time • Date

Use this list tofiles. To renamE . The Tdisplaying the

Message box

397

b

orm appears:

n field appears.

• File

base file or open an existingo collect base data. Base data isOffice software to differentiallyt-processing.

the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

More...


Base stationd / File / m / Base station

Select Base station from the option list. The Collect base data f

The Collect base data form displays the following:

When the Create new file button is highlighted, the Configuratio

• Create new file • Open selected file

Use this form to create a newone. A base station is used tused by the GPS Pathfindercorrect rover files during pos

For more information, refer to

398

b

ured as follows:

ffect on the base station GPS

fields appear:

files in the GeoExplorer 3 data

ure the base station is recordingThe satellites tracked by thestation.

• Time

More...


The GPS configuration settings for base stations are pre-config

• PDOP Mask = 10

• SNR Mask = 2

• Elevation Mask = 0

NOTE These cannot be altered. The GPS slider settings have no esettings.

When the Open selected file button is highlighted, the following

NOTE The Open selected file button only appears if there are basecollection system.

Plan carefully for the roving unit(s) and the base station. Make sdata at the same time that the roving unit is recording positions.rover must be included among the satellites tracked by the base

• File size • Free space

• Date

399

b

that it will track a satellite that theh as hills or buildings that can

tion file, you cannot create a new

s 12 channels to receive GPS

ta file.on the GeoExplorer 3

.

.


The further a rover is from the base station, the greater the riskbase station cannot see. Think about potential obstructions sucblock a satellite signal to the base station.

While the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is logging data to a base starover data file or open an existing one.

NOTE The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system automatically usesignals when you use it as a base station.

Field DescriptionFile size The size, in kilobytes, of the selected daFree space The amount of free space, in kilobytes,

handheld.Time The time when the file was last updatedDate The date when the file was last updated

400

b

e field, select the Create new file

ase station reference positionthat controls how the

tation data.

ging base file data.

Base station option list.

• Altitude

More...


Create new filed / File / m / Base station

To create a new base data file with the name indicated in the Filbutton. The Base station form appears:

Use this form to enter the band the logging informationGeoExplorer 3 logs base s

Press l to start Log

Press m to view the

The following fields are available in the Base station form:

• Lat • Lon

• Antenna height • Measurements

401

b

, automatically uses the lastLon, and Altitude values appear

t enter values for all position

sults of a previously conducted

al for each GPS rover is an exact. If you set the position logging’s measurement logging interval,ifferential corrections. These aref the base station and rover(s)

More...


When you create a new base file the GeoExplorer 3, by defaultreference position entered. If no position has been entered, Lat,as “?”.

If you provide a reference position for the base station, you musfields (Lat, Lon, and Altitude).

You can enter the reference position from a map, or from the recontrol survey.

TIP For greatest accuracy, make sure that the position logging intervmultiple of the measurement logging interval at the base stationinterval to a value that is not an exact multiple of the base stationthe differential correction program has to compute interpolated dless accurate than those computed when the logging intervals oare synchronized.

402

b

Default values is a Last value entered

his is a Last value entered

s is ar HAE,rence.

Last value entered

ric entry

antennathfindert ton (on theGPSr (APC).ntialthfinder

Last value entered

More...


Use this field... to …Lat enter the latitude of the base station. Thi

Numeric entry field.Lon enter the longitude of the base station. T

numeric entry field.Altitude enter the altitude of the base station. Thi

numeric entry field and displays in MSL odepending on the configured altitude refe

Antenna height enter the antenna height. This is a Numefield.

NOTE It is important that you enter theheight correctly, as the GPS PaOffice software uses this heightransform the reference positioground) into the position of thereceiver’s antenna phase centeThis APC is used by the DiffereCorrection utility in the GPS PaOffice software.

403

b

f the

s to logor useTorawbly often.gginge intervalresult in

d by these qualityge space

15 sDefault value


Measurements enter the measurement logging interval obase station.The primary task of a GPS base station iraw GPS measurements from satellites fwhen differentially correcting rover files.provide accurate differential corrections,measurements should be logged reasonaThe maximum permitted measurement lointerval is 30 seconds. You can reduce thto a minimum of one second, but this willup to 30 times as much data being loggeGeoExplorer 3. The default setting of 15provides a good compromise between thof postprocessed positions and the storaand processing time required.

Use this field... to …

404

b

on is displayed in the message

Memory full in

ssage box at the bottom of thedisplays information about thee. The logging icon appears intus bar. It indicates how manysitions have successfully beento the file.

More...


Logging base file dataTo start logging base file data, press l. Logging informatibox.

The message box displays the following:

• Started at • Last •

The mescreenbase filthe StaGPS pologged

Messagebox Logging

icon

405

b

. You are prompted to confirm

rted logging to the data file.opped logging to the data file.ta storage space is full. Thismeasurements logged.


To stop using the GeoExplorer 3 as a base station, press ethat you want to stop logging base station data.

Information DescriptionStarted at The time that the base station staLast The time that the base station stMemory full in The time remaining before the da

value is computed after every 10

406

b

tton in the Collect base dataappears. Select the file to beon and pressE . The Baseerence position, antenna height,

ew file.

omatically uses the reference

erwrites the previously entered

ata file is shown in thenfiguration cannot be edited.


Open selected filed / File / m / Base station

To open an existing base file, highlight the Open selected file buform. Select the File field and press E. A list of base filesopened and presse. Highlight the Open selected file buttstation form appears. Use this form to enter the base station refand measurement logging interval.

For more information about the Base station form, see Create n

NOTE When you open an existing base file, the GeoExplorer 3 autposition that was entered when the file was created.

NOTE Changing the reference position while logging a base file ovreference position.

NOTE The name of a configuration file that is used with the base dConfiguration field. This field cannot be changed and the co

407

b

iew the list of base data files

r 3 automatically generates a fileH X, where:

in that hour, then “B” for thesigned to the third file (“C”)

nge it or enter an entirelypress E . Use the

list of base files appears. Use


Filed / File / m / Base station

Use the File field to change the name of a base data file, or to vcurrently loaded on the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system.

When the Create new file button is highlighted, the GeoExplorename for a new base data file. It is uses the formula B MM DD H

• B is the Filename prefix

• MM is the current UTC month

• DD is the current UTC day of the month

• HH is the current UTC hour of the day

The X increments within this hour, starting at “A” for the first filesecond file, and so on. For example, B052523C is the name ascreated on May 25th, between 2300 and 2400 hours.

The auto-generated file name is only a suggestion. You can chadifferent name. To edit the file name, highlight the File field andText entry field that appears to change the filename.

When the Open selected file button is highlighted, select File. Athis list to select the file to be opened.

408

b

le options.

• Here

More...


Base station option list

d / File / m / Base station / mPress m from the Base station form to display the availab

The options are:

• Waypoint • Unknown

409

b

ion fields with the location of athis option to display a list ofypoint that you want to assign.reference position fields.

eference position in the field,tered in the DifferentialPathfinder Office software.

ion fields with the current GPS


Use this option … to …Waypoint automatically fill in the reference posit

previously recorded waypoint. Selectwaypoints. Use the list to select the waas the base station reference position

Unknown assign null values to the base station

NOTE You do not have to enter a rbut a reference has to be enCorrection utility in the GPS

Here automatically fill in the reference positposition (if any).

410

b

e. If no data file is open,appears:

1 or 5 to highlight it in theighlight the Now or Later button,t the GeoExplorer 3 to start

at feature. Press E . AnUse this form for Entering

new feature open, you cante tab, open an existing

te its attribute data. For morehe Update tab.

g GPS positions before selecting

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 16: The New ta

16161616 The New tabThe New tabThe New tabThe New tabd / New

To display the New tab, press d until the New tab is activThe File tab appears. If a data file is open, the New feature list

To start a new feature, presslist. Then press2 or4 to hdepending on when you wanlogging GPS positions for thattribute entry form appears.attribute values.

NOTE While you have aswitch to the Updafeature, and updainformation, see T

Press m to view the New feature option list.

TIP Use the Advanced datalogging options function to start loggina feature.

411

b

lected feature. The selectedtarted simultaneously. Ther when the GeoExplorer 3 isr logging GPS positions is

used. This lets you modifyto the feature. You can also

begin a feature with an, see Averaged vertices).ar flashes to indicate that the

GPS positions for the selected. For more information, see

to enter the attributes for aure. For example, if you see aLater option and enter the

ards it. When you reach theitions. When you are finished,

nd positions.


Use this option … to …Now start logging GPS positions for the se

feature and GPS data collection are slogging icon appears in the Status balogging GPS positions. The default foNow.

Later open the feature with GPS logging paattribute values before GPS is addeduse the Later option when you want toaveraged vertex (for more informationThe pause logging icon in the status bGeoExplorer 3 is not currently storingfeature. To start logging, press lPause and resume logging.The Later option is useful if you wantfeature, but you are not yet at the feattree feature in the distance, select theattributes for the tree as you walk towtree, press l to start logging pospress e to store the attributes a

412

b

riate attribute entry form appears:

riate data entry field appears—try. Use this field to enter thetions for the feature, pressrs. (See Storing features.)

o confirm that you want tositions.

to enter attribute values for the

ribute entry form option list.


Entering attribute valuesd / New / <Feature>

When you select a feature from the New feature list, an approp

To enter a value for an attribute, select the attribute. The appropMenu entry, Numeric entry, Text entry, Date entry, or Time envalue. When you have entered attribute data and collected posie . The feature is stored and the New feature list reappea

To discard a feature, press f+ e . You are prompted tabandon changes. This will discard the feature attributes and po

Use the <feature name> formfeature.

Pressm to view the Att

413

b

try form.

• New vertex

end on the type of feature

cted, the only option is Offset.

ected, the available options are

ted, Offset, Segment, and.

More...


Attribute entry form option listd / New / <Feature> / mPress m to display the options available in the attribute en

The options are:

• Offset • Segment

The options that appear depselected.

When a point feature is sele

When an area feature is selOffset and New vertex.

When a line feature is selecNew vertex are all available

414

b

m and select Offset. Thethe offset information. For

select Segment. For more.e vertex is open, all positions

e position on a line. For more


Use thisoption …

to …

Offset create an offset for this feature only. PressOffset form appears. Use this form to entermore information, see Offsets.

Segment segment a line feature. Press m andinformation, see Segmenting line features

New vertex open a vertex within a line or area. While threcorded will be averaged to create a singlinformation, see Averaged vertices.

415

b

sitions for the feature, pressthe bottom of the New featurefully.

+ e .

More...


Storing featuresTo save the contents of an attribute entry form and store the poe . A message is displayed briefly in the message box, atlist. The message indicates that the feature was stored success

To abandon a feature and return to the New feature list, pressf

Message box

416

b

d attributes for a feature. Whileany GPS positions that areure, remain stationary at thebefore pressinge . Ifthe feature or around the

pressing e .

minimum number of positionsether you want to store the

lorer 3 stores the currentou select No, the attribute formrer 3 continues to record GPSure.


You may not want to presse as soon as you have enterethe feature is “active” (while you are in the attribute entry form),logged are associated with that feature. If recording a point featfeature until the minimum number of positions has been loggedrecording a line or area feature, continue to walk or drive alongperimeter until you have traversed the feature completely before

If you are collecting a feature and you press e before thehas been logged, the GeoExplorer 3 prompts you to confirm whfeature.

If you select Yes, the GeoExpnumber of GPS positions. If yreappears, and the GeoExplopositions for the selected feat

417

b

e logging icon appears in theGeoExplorer 3 stops loggingin the status bar.

rd GPS positions, or velocities. Itonfigured for Carrier Phase Datatprocessing.

nction to stop briefly, or if youine or area feature and have tome obstacle before picking uperimeter again.

More...


Pause and resume loggingWhen the GeoExplorer 3 handheld is logging GPS positions, thStatus bar. Pressl to pause logging. While paused, theGPS positions and the pause icon flashes over the logging icon

When GPS logging is paused, the GeoExplorer 3 does not recodoes continue to record carrier measurements (if the feature is cCollection) and certain critical GPS information required for pos

Pause icon

Use the pause fuare collecting a ltravel around sothe line or area p

418

b

ops flashing and the logging iconline or area feature, the

rdless of the logging interval that

gging to a rover data file. You


To resume logging GPS, pressl again. The pause icon stappears again. Each time you resume logging while collecting aGeoExplorer 3 data collection system logs a GPS position (regayou have set for line/area features).

NOTE You can only use pause and resume logging when you are locannot do this when logging GPS data to a base station file.

419

b

ions.

More...


New feature option listd / New / mPress m from New feature list to display the available opt

The options are:

• Repeat • Continue <feature>

420

b

select Repeat. A ✓ appearsRepeat option. For mores.sm and select Continuereappears.

area feature, you can closember of point features, andrea using the Continue option.Continuing line and area


Use this option … to …Repeat repeat a feature. Press m and

in the check box to the right of theinformation, see Repeating feature

Continue <feature> continue a line or area feature. Pres<feature>. The attribute entry form

NOTE While traversing a line orthe feature, collect any nuthen continue the line or aFor more information, seefeatures.

421

e tab


active.

is not currently open, Theears. When a data file ispdate feature list appears. Toature, select it from the list.entry form appears.ave an existing feature openupdate, you can switch to theen a new feature, and recordd GPS data. For more, see The New tab.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 17: The Updat

17171717 The Update tabThe Update tabThe Update tabThe Update tabNOTE Data update, using transferred .ssf files, is not available with

d / Update

To display the Update tab, press d until the Update tab is

Press m to view the Update feature option list.

Messagebox

If a data fileFile tab appopen, the Uupdate a feAn attributeWhile you hfor attributeNew tab, opattribute aninformation

422

e tab

ea

ibute information for the

hat will be displayed, use thehe Setup tab.ted feature was collected or

ion to the highlighted feature,

he highlighted point feature.ighted line feature.hted area feature.


The message box at the bottom of the screen displays:

• Labels • Date and Time

• Distance to point/start • Positions / Length / Ar

Information DescriptionLabels Two configurable labels showing attr

highlighted feature.

TIP To select the two attributes tFeature settings option in t

Date and Time The date and time when the highlighlast updated.

Distance to point/start

The distance from your current positor the start point of a line or area.

Positions / Length /Area

The number of positions logged for tThe computed 2D length of the highlThe computed 2D area of the highlig

423

e tab

re a check box appears to the

st is empty. A message

c edition. The GeoExplorer 3cathfinder Office software.

the feature is not updated.

a ✓ , the feature is updated.

Mark.

More...


Updating attribute valuesd / Update / <Feature>

When a file is transferred from the GPS Pathfinder Office softwaright of each feature.

NOTE When no features are stored in the file, the Update feature liindicates that there are no features.

NOTE The ✓ and " symbols do not appear on the GeoExplorer 3edition does not support transferred .ssf files from the GPS P

If a check box is empty,

If the check box contains

For more information see

424

e tab

ibute entry form appears:

entry field appears: Menu entry,

dated information is stored ande has been updated.

o confirm this cancellation.

s to files transferred from theu update features collected

te values for the feature.

pdate attribute option list.


To update a feature select it from the Update feature list. An attr

To edit the value for an attribute, select it. The appropriate dataNumeric entry, Text entry, Date entry, or Time entry.

When you have edited the attribute data, press e. The upthe Update feature list reappears. A ✓ indicates that the featur

To abandon a feature, press fe . You are prompted t

NOTE The ✓ (to indicate that a feature has been updated) only applieGPS Pathfinder Office software. A ✓ does not appear when yoduring a current data collection/update session.

Use the form to edit the attribu

Press m to display the U

425

e tab

list.

n transferred from the GPS

• New vertex

More...


Update attribute option listd / Update / <Feature> / mPress m from the attribute entry form to display the option

The options are:

NOTE The Mark option only appears when the updated file has beePathfinder Office software.

• Offset • Mark

426

e tab

ure in the update feature list.

e selected feature. When your a feature, a ✓ automaticallytion to manually insert a ✓ to

his option only appears in thehave chosen to update GPSis open, all positions recordedosition on a line. For more


Use this option … to …Offset create an offset for the selected feat

For more information, see Offsets.Mark place a ✓ in the check box next to th

update the attributes or GPS data foappears in the check box. Use this opmark the feature as updated.

New vertex Open a vertex within a line or area. TUpdate attribute option list once youdata for the feature. While the vertexwill be averaged to create a single pinformation, see Averaged vertices.

427

e tab

attribute entry form appears.logging GPS positions.ce fields are configured, thee Data form in the Setup tab to

ata and starts logging GPS dataf you select No, it does not log

More...


Updating GPS dataTo update the GPS data for a feature, select it from the list. ThePress l . The GeoExplorer 3 data collection system startsDepending on how the Allow GPS update and Warning distanGeoExplorer 3 prompts you to confirm the GPS update. (Use thconfigure these fields.)

If you select Yes, the GeoExplorer 3 replaces the existing GPS dnow or later depending on the option selected on the New tab. Inew GPS data.

428

e tab

if a new feature is open in The. However, you can still update

e . The updatednew GPS positions replace the

to the feature to indicate that it is


NOTE You can only update GPS data for one feature at a time, soNew tab, you cannot update GPS data for an existing featureits attribute information (see Updating attribute values).

When you have finished collecting positions for a feature, pressinformation is stored and the Update feature list reappears. Theexisting position for the selected feature and a ✓ appears nextupdated.

429

e tab

t

list.

• Filter

• Position / Summary


Update feature option lisd / Update / mPress m from the Update feature list to display the option

The options are:

• Delete / Undelete • Sort

• Search • Set target / Clear target

430

e tab

s m and then select

To delete the current target, youclear the target status from theet.

o the office computer where you

d 4 are deleted.

o not appear on the Map or

rom the Update feature list,d select Undelete. The lineame.


Delete / Undeleted / Update / m / Delete

To delete a feature from the Update feature list, highlight it. PresDelete. A line appears through the deleted feature.

You cannot delete a feature if it is the current navigation target.must first select a different feature or waypoint as the target, orcurrent target. For more information, see Set target / Clear targ

The GPS Pathfinder Office software transfers deleted features tcan undelete them, but it does not export them to the GIS.

In this example, features 1 an

NOTE Deleted features dthe Chart.

To restore a deleted feature fhighlight it. Press m andisappears from the feature n

431

e tab

he Sort by sublist appears (see

e list is sorted appear at the end

signed when the feature isnumber assigned to a feature.

, sort the Update feature list by

• Distance

o last.om closest to furthest away.


Sortd / Update / m / Sort

To sort the Update feature list, press m and select Sort. TSublists). The options are:

A sort is applied at the time you select it. Features added after thof the list regardless of the sorting order.

NOTE Each feature in a file has a unique feature number that is ascreated. Sorting the Update feature list does not change the

TIP To display features so that their feature numbers are sequentialtime.

• Feature • Time

Use this option … to …Feature sort by feature name.Time sort by the time recorded, from first tDistance sort by distance to start of feature, fr

432

e tab

g features based on a set of

he Filter by sublist appears (see

the Update feature list. This iconen.

re retained in the Update featureia are hidden.

not appear in the update featureyed at a time. Each new filter

• Attribute

More...


Filterd / Update / m / Filter

Filtering on the GeoExplorer 3 is a method of selectively viewincriteria set out below.

To filter the Update feature list, pressm and select Filter. TSublists). The options are:

When a filter is applied, the filter icon appears in the title ofalso appears beside the filename at the bottom of the Map scre

Whenever a filter is applied, the features that match the criteria alist and in the Map screen. Features that do not match the criter

A filter remains in effect until a file is closed. New features maylist, depending on how the list is filtered. Only one filter is displareplaces the previous one.

• None • Feature

• Time • Status

433

e tab

signed when the feature isnumber assigned to a feature.

ture list and the Map tab.feature type. Select the

(see Checklists). Select theIf you select the Gate feature,s filtered and only Gate

attribute values. Select thete form appears. You can usen attribute value from a single

More...


NOTE Each feature in a file has a unique feature number that is ascreated. Filtering the Update feature list does not change the

Use this option … to …None remove all filters from the Update feaFeature filter the Update feature list based on

Feature option. A checklist appearsfeature type(s) that you want to filter.for example, the Update feature list ifeatures are displayed.

Attribute filter the Update feature list based onAttribute option. The Filter by attributhis form to set a filter which selects afeature or across all features.

434

e tab

the time or date that a featureisplay only those featuresa.m. and 12:00 p.m.rs with the four fields: Startate. Filter the list using one orelect it and use the

the current status of thethis option to display onlyd during the current session).appears with the options:

er. The Update list is filteredpear.

• Imported

• Updated


Time filter the Update feature list based onwas started. For example, you can dcollected on May 26th, between 9:00Select the Time option. A form appeatime, Start date, End time, and End dmore of these fields. To edit a field, sNumeric entry field to enter a value.

Status filter the Update feature list based onfeatures. For example, you can usethose features that are new (collecteSelect the Status option. A checklist

Select the status that you want to filtand only features with that status ap


• Deleted

• Not deleted

• New

435

e tab

e Filter by attribute form:

ute field appears. Select the Anyttribute name to filter only values

Feature type field to set aes in all features to they in the Operator and Attribute

ure type field to set a filter thats in features of that type.

More...


Filter by attribute formd / Update / m / Filter / Filter by Attribute

Select the Attribute option from the Filter by sublist to display th

When you select a feature from the Feature type field, the Attriboption to filter all attributes from this feature type, or select an ain that attribute.

Select the Any option from thefilter that compares all attributoperator and value you specifvalue fields.

Select a feature from the Featonly compares attribute value

436

e tab

you have made in the Feature

t are …accepted.

lue must include the value younter “pot”, then the valuesepted, as well as “pot”.

he attribute may include the

ensitive.

value must be greater than thees, “a” is considered the lowestor example, if you specify”, “parrot”, and “tree” ared “cat” are not.

ue must be less than the text

More...


The options in the Operator field depend on the selections thattype and Attribute fields.

If the attribute type is … the options in the Operator lisAny, Text, or File • None — any attribute value is

• Containing — the attribute vaspecify. For example, if you e“potato” and “spot” will be acc

• Not containing — no part of tvalue you specify.

NOTE The text is not case s

• Greater than — the attributetext you specify. For text valuvalue and “z” is the highest. F“park”, then the values “parksaccepted, but “parachute” an

• Less than — the attribute valyou specify.

437

e tab

must match the value you

alue must not match the value

t are …


Numeric, Date, or Time • None

• Equals — the attribute valuespecify exactly.

• Not equal to — the attribute vyou specify.

• Greater than

• Less thanMenu • Equals

• Not equal to

If the attribute type is … the options in the Operator lis

438

e tab

list. You can also search from

rch. The Search form appears.

ria are searched.

s one option, Reset. Select thises.

cting a search direction,rison operator, and a value tolose this form and start theatches the search criteria is

ure list.

rom the currently highlightedrt or end of the list.

More...


Searchd / Update / m / Search

Searching is a method of locating features in the Update featureThe Map tab.

To search the Update feature list, press m and select Sea

NOTE If a filter is applied, only the features that meet the filter crite

Press m to display the Search option list. This list containoption to return the fields in the Search form to their default valu

Set the search criteria by selefeature type, attribute, compasearch for. Press e to csearch. The first feature that mhighlighted in the Update feat

NOTE The search starts ffeature, not the sta

439

e tab

• Attribute

lect Forwards to search frompdate feature list or Map tabkwards to search from the

he list.Select Any to search all

feature to search. Select Anyfeature.ield, this field does not appear.he search. The operatorsble for filtering by attribute.

tribute form.


The Search form contains:

• Direction • Feature Type

• Operator • Attribute Value

Use this field … to …Direction specify the direction of the search. Se

the currently selected feature in the Utowards the end of the list. Select Bacselected feature towards the start of t

Feature Type select a single feature type to search.features in the Update feature list.

Attribute specify an attribute from the selectedto search all attributes in the selectedIf Any is selected in the Feature type f

Operator specify the comparison operation for tavailable are the same as those availaFor more information, see Filter by at

Attribute Value specify the search value.

440

e tab

the navigation target, pressears beside the selected feature

position information as theis deleted or has no positions.

the Update feature list, it is alsothe NAV section.

More...


Set target / Clear targetd / Update / m / Set target

d / Update / m / Clear target

To set the currently selected feature in the Update feature list asm and select Set target. The crossed-flag target icon appin the list, and is cleared from any previously selected target.

NOTE You cannot select a deleted feature or a feature that has notarget. This option is not available when the selected feature

When you set a target inset in the Map tab and in

Currentnavigationtarget

441

e tab

Update feature list that ishe target icon disappears from

and NAV sections.


To clear the currently selected target, highlight the feature in theselected as the target, press m, and select Clear target. Tbeside the feature name, and the target is cleared in the DATA

442

e tab

te feature option list, pressfeature appear in the messagedisplayed is the average GPSstart point of the feature.

age box display to showmary.


Position / Summaryd / Update / m / Position

d / Update / m / Summary

To view the GPS position of the feature highlighted in the Updam and select Position. The coordinates of the highlightedbox at the bottom of the screen. For point features, the positionposition. For line and area features, the position displayed is the

When the Position option is selected, you can change the messsummary information. To do this, pressm and select Sum

443b

.

. If no data file is open, The File

se this tab to view and selectatures for update. It is aaphical view of the Updateature list that you access frome Update tab.

essm to view theap option list.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceDATA section – 18: The Map ta

18181818 The Map tabThe Map tabThe Map tabThe Map tabNOTE The Map tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition

d / Map

To display the Map tab, pressd until the Map tab is activetab appears. If a data file is open, the Map tab appears:

UfegrfeTh

PrM

Scale

Current position

North

Updated

Line featureFilename

Area feature

Waypoint

GPS trailpoint feature

Betweenindicator

Filter icon

Last selectedfeature

Targetfeature GPS

444b

Use the Map tab, in the DATAem as targets. Use The Chart

ts.

• Features

• GPS trail

• Scale

More...


The Map screen displays:

NOTE There are two map screens available on the GeoExplorer 3.section, to view, select, and update features as well as set thtab, in the NAV section, to navigate to features and waypoin

• Between feature GPS • Current position

• Filename • Filter icon

• Last selected feature • North indicator (N)

• Target • Waypoint

445b

ged between features.

ature type appears as aa feature indicates that the

ntly open.been applied to the file. Useto set or clear a filter.

ave taken.ains highlighted.

in/out, the scale changes

the target.


Item DescriptionBetween featureGPS

Small crosses that show all positions log

Current position Your current GPS position.Features Point, line, and area features. Each fe

different symbol on the map. The ✓ onfeature is updated.

Filename The name of the data file that is curreFilter icon An icon that appears when a filter has

the Filter option in the Map option listGPS trail A trail of dots that shows the path you hLast selectedfeature

The last selected feature on the map rem

North indicator (N) North direction.Scale The scale of the screen. As you zoom

accordingly.Target The feature or waypoint currently set asWaypoint A waypoint on the GeoExplorer 3.

446b

the same tasks using it as youure list are related. When youUpdate feature list, and vicefrom the list.

, press two arrow keys at the

is visible, the cursor initiallyselected feature is not visible,the last location on the screenrwise, the cursor appears in the

More...


Using the Map tabThe Map tab is similar to The Update tab. You can perform allcan using the Update feature list. The Map tab and Update featselect a feature on the map, the same feature is selected in theversa. If you delete a feature on the map, that feature is deleted

TIP To move between these two tabs, press d.

To display the cursor, press an arrow key.

To move the cursor, press the arrow keys. To move it diagonallysame time.

If the selected featureappears over it. If thethe cursor appears at(if that is visible). Othecenter of the screen.

Cursor

447b

is close to a feature, the symbold up to two labels showinglected.

the Feature settings option in

e information disappears.r feature is selected.

tically pans (half a screen width)the same geographic position. Inle.

ple, the Gate feature isected.

More...


Use the cursor to select a feature on the map. When the cursorfor that feature is highlighted, and the feature number, name, anattribute values from the feature are displayed. The feature is se

TIP To configure the two attributes that are displayed as labels, usethe Setup tab.

As the cursor moves away from a highlighted feature, the featurHowever, the feature remains selected (highlighted) until anothe

When the cursor moves to the edge of the map, the map automain the direction of the cursor movement. The cursor remains inthese circumstances, the current GPS position may not be visib

In this examcurrently sel

Selected feature

448b

to pan the screen (half a screenisible.

n is not visible, the screene center of the screen.


Alternatively, press f2, f4, f1, or f5width). You cannot pan across the screen unless the cursor is v

To remove the cursor, press e . If the current GPS positioautomatically pans until the current GPS position symbol is in th

449b

• Zoom extents

• Filter

• Layers

More...


Map option listd / Map / mPress m to display the available options for the Map.

The options are:

• Zoom in • Zoom out

• Pan/select • Delete

• Set target • Search

450b

is magnifies the display (bye bottom of the screen adjusts, the screen zooms in on thethe screen zooms in on the

his lets you see a greater arean the bottom of the screens active, the screen zooms outr is not active, the screenposition.

ayers are visible on the maps. What it shows depends onthe features are filtered.een, the Zoom extents option

More...


Use this option … to …Zoom in zoom in to the map screen.

Press m and select Zoom in. Thdecreasing the scale). The scale on thaccordingly. When the cursor is activecursor. When the cursor is not active,current GPS position.

Zoom out zoom out of the map screen.Press m and select Zoom out. T(by increasing the scale). The scale oadjusts accordingly. When the cursor irelative to the cursor. When the cursozooms out relative to the current GPS

Zoom extents change the scale so that all selected lscreen. The Zoom extents option variewhat layers are selected and whetherIf nothing can be displayed on the scrdoes not affect the map scale.

451b

creen in the direction of thee cursor to select features on-

is, highlight it with the cursor,e appears through the deletedthe feature is deleted from the

use the

currently set as the target

More...


Pan/select activate the on-screen cursor.Use the on-screen cursor to pan the scursor movement. You can also use thscreen.

Delete delete a feature from the map. To do thpress m, and select Delete. A linfeature in the Update feature list andmap.

NOTE To restore deleted featuresUpdate feature option list.

NOTE A feature or waypoint that iscannot be deleted.


452b

ap screen. Select the Filterwing options:

on the feature names.

on attribute values.

the time or date a feature wasded.

n the current status of the

urrently selected by the cursorarget. The crossed-flag targetor waypoint.

Clear target.

More...


Filter filter the features that appear on the moption. A sublist appears with the follo

• None – Removes all filters.

• Feature – Filters the features based

• Attribute – Filters the features based

• Time – Filters the features based onstarted, or the time or date it was en

• Status – Filters the features based ofeatures.

For more information, see Filter.Set target set the feature or waypoint, which is c

on the map screen, as the navigation ticon appears over the selected featureFor more information, see Set target /


453b

r on the map screen. Selectppears. Select a searcharison operator, and attribute

m to start the search. The firstearch criteria is highlighted. Ifn also appears.

p screen. Select the Layersyers:

ed in the current data file. Whened on the map screen.

stored on the GeoExplorer 3.displayed on the map screen.

at shows the path you haveof dots is displayed on the mapimum of 60 positions. Olddded.

More...


Search search among the features that appeathe Search option. The Search form adirection, feature type, attribute, compvalue to search for, then close this forfeature on the map that matches the sthe cursor is active, feature informatio

For more information, see Search.Layers specify the layers displayed on the ma

option. A checklist appears with the la

• Feature – Displays the features storthis is selected, features are display

• Waypoint – Displays the waypointsWhen this is selected, waypoints are

• GPS trail – Displays a trail of dots thtaken. When this is selected, a trailscreen. The trail shows up to a maxpositions drop off as new ones are a


454b

rail of small crosses that shows (see Log between features).

that are updated. For line andtart point. For more

ected except GPS trail.


Layers (continued) • Between feature GPS – Displays a tall positions logged between feature

• Updated – Displays a ✓ on featuresarea features the ✓ appears at the sinformation, see The Update tab.

NOTE By default, all layers are sel


NAV section – IntroductionGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Reference 455

THE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONTHE NAV SECTIONUse the NAV section to navigate to features and waypoints. Each tab in the NAV section providesyou with a different way of navigating. With the Road tab, you navigate using a road screen; withthe Compass tab, you use a compass; and with the Chart tab, you use a map to navigate to afeature or waypoint. Choose the navigation method that suits your current situation or personalpreference.

Press n to move between the tabs in the NAV section.

The NAV section has three tabs:

NOTE The Chart tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c edition.

• The Road tab • The Compass tab • The Chart tab

456b

ive. The road navigation screen

ou may not be able to drive

• Info windows

navigate to targets and toation about your location relativeof the target.

to view the Road option list.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 19: The Road ta

19191919 The Road tabThe Road tabThe Road tabThe Road tabn / Road

To display the Road tab, press n until the Road tab is actappears:

The Road screen contains:

WARNING The Road tab displays a straight line bearing to the target. Ydirectly to a target using this tab as a source of direction.

• Current position • Target name

Use this tab todisplay informto the location

Press mCurrent

Info windows

Target name

position

457b

cation relative to the target.ight ahead, towards the top of

rget you are navigating to. A.t the bottom of the screen) toInfo window is only displayedmore information about

ption list.


Item DescriptionCurrent position The person symbol represents your lo

The person symbol always heads strathe screen. This is your heading.

Target name The target name is the name of the ta“?” appears when no target is selected

Info windows You can configure the Info windows (aprovide navigational information. Theif one or more items are selected. Forconfiguring Info windows, see Road o

458b

, select a target.

ars:

ate feature option list, or Map

• None

ature or a waypoint as your

More...


Using the Road tabUse The Road tab to navigate to targets. To activate navigation

To select a target press E . The Select target screen appe

The Select target screen has three buttons:

NOTE You can also select a target using the Road option list, Updoption list.

• New • List

Use this screen to select a fetarget.

459b

e you to it. The graphical displaythe screen shows what action isnavigational information that you

op of the screen.

creen. When you are off course,kwise or counter-clockwise) that

mation displayed in this screeno the selected target.

More...


When you select a target, the Road screen animates to navigatshows where you are and where the target is. The animation ofrequired. The Info windows, at the bottom of the screen, displaycan use to navigate to the target.

The heading, or direction you are going, is always towards the t

When you are on course, the road is displayed vertically in the sthe road is skewed (at an angle) on the screen. The angle (clocthe road is turned depends on how far off course you are.

Road centerline

Target

Use the inforto navigate t

Target name

Info windows

Current position

460b

:

son symbol will be ahead of the

ventually the target moves awayyou have reached the target by

een you and the target.

More...


If you are seriously off course, the screen will look similar to this

If you are moving in the opposite direction to the target, the pertarget symbol.

As you move closer to the target, the road width increases and efrom the edge towards the center of the screen. You know thatusing the Distance in the Info windows. This is the distance betw

461b

d the road screen will graphicallyff the road this means that youance between the start point and

ters Close-up mode. As youbar and a proximity alarmd indicates its distance from you,een as you approach the target.is directly over the target symbol.

s example, the X-Track Infow is shown (the default Infows are Distance, Road Signelocity).

t which Info windows are shown,fo windows.

More...


In situations where a start waypoint or feature has been specifiedisplay the cross-track error. When the person symbol moves ohave moved away from the line that represents the shortest distthe target. The following screen appears:

When you are within 15 meters of the target, the road screen enenter Close-up mode, a target icon appears briefly in the statussounds. In this mode the position of the target symbol on the roaand it moves towards the person symbol in the center of the scrWhen you have reached the target position, the person symbol

NOTE In thiwindowindoand V

To sesee In

462b

t sound again unless you moveove back within the 15-meter

tting the beep volume to Off in

his button, the New waypointinformation, and press

vigates you to the target. Fortab.and features on the

waypoint, and press e .ou to the target. For more

are those stored in the openis open, no features are


NOTE Once you enter Close-up mode, the proximity alarm does noto a position more than 20 meters from the target and then mrange, or you select a different target.

TIP You can turn off the proximity alarm, and all other sounds, by sethe SYS section. For more information, see Configurations.

Use this button … to …New enter a new target. When you select t

form appears. Enter the new waypointe . The screen animates and namore information, see Using the Road

List select a target from a list of waypointsGeoExplorer 3. Highlight a feature orThe screen animates and navigates yinformation, see Using the Road tab.

NOTE Features available in the listdata file. When no data fileavailable in this list.

None indicate that no target is selected.

463b

• New waypoint

• Select start


Road option listn / Road / mPress m to view the available options.

The options are:

• Info windows • Select target

• Edit waypoints • Delete waypoints

• Road scale

464b

tion screen, select the InfoA checklist appears:

More...


Info windowsn / Road / m / Info windows

To configure the Info windows display at the bottom of a navigawindows option from the option list (Road, Compass, or Chart).

465b

it. To add an item to the display,To remove an item from the

e items displayed, first removen is displayed at the bottom ofou can only display one other

roll up and down to see them

• Heading

• Current time

tes • Altitude

More...


The items are:

When an item is selected there is a ✓ in the check box besidehighlight it, and press E . A ✓ appears in that check box.display, highlight it, and press E . The ✓ disappears.

NOTE You can display zero, one, two, or three items. To change ththose currently selected. If you select no items, no informatiothe navigation screen. If you select Coordinates or Go N/E, yitem.

NOTE Not all items in the checklist fit on the screen at one time. Scall. Checklists scroll in a cyclical fashion.

• Distance • Road sign • Bearing

• Turn • Cross track • Velocity

• Arrive in • ETA • Coordina

• Go N/E • Go up

466b

rrent GPS position and thedistance to the target,rget is selected, the value

. If no target is selected, the

ngle that you should follow torrent GPS position and thee displayed is N/A.or, if you are stationary, the

GeoExplorer 3 handheld.give an accurate heading, soeading can be displayedselected.

d the heading. The directionjust your heading (left or right)lected, the value displayed is

More...


Checklist item This item displays …Distance the distance remaining between the cu

target. This is the shortest great-circlecomputed on your local datum. If no tadisplayed is N/A.

Road sign the direction in which you need to turnvalue displayed is N/A.

Bearing the bearing to the target. This is the atake the shortest path between the cutarget. If no target is selected, the valu

Heading the direction in which you are travelingdirection in which you are pointing theWhen you are stationary, GPS cannotthe internal digital compass is used. Hwhether or not a target or start point is

Turn the difference between the bearing anyou need to turn to face the target. Adby the amount shown. If no target is seN/A.

467b

st line between the start pointght) is indicated by “←” ordistance you need to travel inen you are on track, you areen you are off track, the personcenterline. The distance away

s how far off track you are.ay the cross track. When nolue displayed is N/A.into account change in

The velocity can be displayedselected.

oExplorer 3 data collectioning the Formats form. Theor not a target or start point is

target. This value takes yours a larger value if you are noto target is selected, the value

More...


Cross track the direction and distance of the shorteand the target. The direction (left or ri“→”. The numeric value indicates thethat direction to get back on track. Whtraveling straight towards the target. Whsymbol appears some distance from thefrom the centerline (left or right) indicateSelect a start point and target to displstart point or target is selected, the va

Velocity your current velocity. This value takesaltitude as well as horizontal velocity.whether or not a target or start point is

Current time the current time configured on the Gesystem. Configure the current time uscurrent time can be displayed whetherselected.

Arrive in the time remaining until you reach thecurrent heading into account and showheading directly towards the target. If ndisplayed is N/A.

Checklist item This item displays …

468b

et. This is based on the Arriveet is selected, the value

ate system that is displayedigure the coordinate system,s can be displayed whether orWhen the GeoExplorer 3 isvalue displayed is N/A.e current altitude value is still

nd east component. If nois N/A.e target. If no target is


ETA the expected time of arrival at the targin time and the Current time. If no targdisplayed is N/A.

Coordinates the current GPS position. The coordindepends on the configuration. To confuse the Coordinates form. Coordinatenot a target or start point is selected.unable to compute GPS positions, the

Altitude your altitude. If no target is selected, thdisplayed.

Go N/E the direction to the target as a north atarget is selected, the value displayed

Go up the vertical distance (up or down) to thselected, the value displayed is N/A.

Checklist item This item displays …

469b

the option list (Road, Compass,

• None

ature or a waypoint as your


Select targetn / Road / m / Select target

To select a target waypoint, choose the Select target option fromor Chart). The Select target screen appears:


• New • List

Use this screen to select a fetarget.

470b

waypoint. When a new waypointe is GPS and the suffix is a three-ple, GPS004. When a newursor and the suffix is a three-

ple, Cursor017.

changes. Pressfe to


New waypointn / Road / m / New waypoint

To create a new waypoint, select the New waypoint optionfrom the option list (Road, Compass, or Chart). The Newwaypoint form appears:

Use this form to enter new waypoint information. The Newwaypoint form requires Text entry and Numeric entry.

Press m to display the Here option. Use the Hereoption to automatically update the Lat, Lon, and Altitude fieldswith the current GPS position.

The GeoExplorer 3 automatically generates a name for the newis created using the current GPS position, the prefix for the namdigit number (starting at 000 for the first one created). For examwaypoint is created using the cursor, the prefix for the name is Cdigit number (starting at 000 for the first one created). For exam

When you have completed data entry, presse to save theclose the form and abandon any changes.

NOTE The GeoExplorer 3 handheld can store 1,000 waypoints.

471b

ypoint information. The Editt entry and Numeric entry.

Here option. Use the Herete the Lat, Lon, and Altitude

position.

data entry, presse to saveto close the form and


Edit waypointsn / Road / m / Edit waypoints

To edit a waypoint, select the Edit waypoints option from theoption list (Road, Compass, or Chart). An Edit waypoints listappears:

This list shows all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system. Select the one to be edited. The Editwaypoints form appears.

Use this form to edit the wawaypoint form requires Tex

Press m to display theoption to automatically updafields with the current GPS

When you have completedthe changes. Pressfeabandon any changes.

472b

elete waypoints list.

Delete all option. Use the Deleteints stored on the GeoExplorer 3.

ion does not delete a waypointart or target.


Delete waypointsn / Road / m / Delete waypoints

To delete a waypoint, select the Delete waypoints option fromthe option list. A Delete waypoints list appears:

This list shows all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 datacollection system. Select the one to be deleted. You areprompted to confirm the deletion.

A waypoint that is set as the start or target cannot be deleted,and cannot be selected from the list.

Select Yes to delete thewaypoint indicated.

Select No to go back to the D

Pressm to display theall option to delete all waypo

NOTE The Delete all optif it is set as the st

473b

ption list (Road, Compass, or

• None

aypoint or feature that you want

More...


Select startn / Road / m / Select start

To select a start point, choose the Select start option from the oChart). The Select start screen appears:

The Select start screen has three buttons:

• New • List

Use this screen to select the wto start navigating from.

474b

target. If no start point isis displayed as N/A.

s a bold diamond ( ) symbol.

ct this button, the

ailable waypoints and features

are those stored in the openis open, no features are


NOTE You do not have to select a start point before navigating to aspecified, some navigational information in the Info windows

NOTE A start point is displayed in the Road, Chart, and Map tabs a

Use this button … to …New enter a new waypoint. When you sele

New waypoint form appears.List select the start point from the list of av

on the GeoExplorer 3 handheld.

NOTE Features available in the listdata file. When no data fileavailable.

None indicate that there is no start point.

475b

e the Road scale option from theyou want to follow a path when

nt to stay close to the path youon track is less important, set a

, the road


Road scalen / Road / m / Road scaleTo change the scale of the Road screen that is displayed, choosRoad option list. Set the road scale according to how accuratelynavigating between a start and a target. For example, if you waare traveling, set a small road scale, for example, 10. If stayinglarger road scale, for example, 90.

In this example, the roadscale is set to 90.

And in this examplescale is set to 10.

476ss tab

ab is active. The Compass tab

• Compass rose

combined internal and GPSe it to orient yourself, and totarget.

to view thetion list.

hen you receive youroExplorer 3 the internalmpass may require Calibration.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 20: The Compa

20202020 The Compass tabThe Compass tabThe Compass tabThe Compass tabn / Compass

To display the Compass tab, press n until the Compass tappears:

The Compass screen contains:

• Your heading • Current position

• Target name • Info windows

This tab is acompass. Usnavigate to a

PressmCompass op

NOTE WGeco

Current

Target name

Info windows

Yourheading

position

Compass rose

477ss tab

direction or heading.relative to the target. Your

ards the top of the screen).irection in which you are

f the target you are navigatingpears.the bottom of the screen to

Info window is only displayedmore information aboutdows.


Item DescriptionYour heading The top of the compass indicates yourCurrent position The + symbol represents your location

heading is always straight ahead (towCompass rose The compass rotates to indicate the d

heading.Target name The target name indicates the name o

to. When no target is selected a “?” apInfo windows You can configure the Info windows at

provide navigational information. Theif one or more items are selected. Forconfiguring Info windows, see Info win

478ss tab

ets. The bearings are calculated3 automatically switches

heading at all times, whether you

ence.

compass the GeoExplorer 3 is

More...


Using the Compass tabUse The Compass tab to orient yourself and to navigate to targby an internal compass and GPS information. The GeoExplorerbetween these at a certain velocity. This provides an accurateare moving or stationary.

The compass always points towards the configured North refer

The type of compass that is displayed indicates which mode ofusing. The GPS compass is the more detailed one.

GPS compass

Internalcompass

479ss tab

p of the GeoExplorer 3 data isaccuracy of 1 in 8; that is, it can

ill accurately display all compass

ct a target pressE . The

• None

target.

More...


When the internal compass is being used, make sure that the tolevel, to give an accurate reading. The internal compass has andisplay the eight main compass headings. The GPS compass wheadings.

To navigate to a target, first select a feature or waypoint. To seleSelect target screen appears:


NOTE You can also select a target using the Compass option list.

• New • List

Use this screen to select the

480ss tab

ide of the compass diagram.

u selected appears as a crossed-ithin the compass diagramaring to the target to navigate toents the direction to the target

urrent direction (heading).

ding. To change this, see Info

reen to navigate to the target.

indows at the bottom of thelay information that you can useto the target.

More...


When a target is selected, the target symbol appears on the ins

The top of the compass shows your heading. The target that yoflag symbol on the inside of the compass diagram. Its position windicates the bearing to the target. Use your heading and the bethe target. Navigate by lining up the target symbol, which repres(bearing), with the top of the compass, which represents your c

NOTE The default Info windows are Distance, Road Sign, and Heawindows.

Target

Target name

Current position

Info windows

Use this sc

The Info wscreen dispto navigate

481ss tab

rs Close-up mode. As you enterd a proximity alarm sounds. Thex. In this mode the position offrom you, and it moves towards

u have reached the targetmbol.

t sound again unless you moveove back within the 15-meter

tting the beep volume to Off in

More...


When you are within 15 meters of the target, the compass enteClose-up mode, a target icon appears briefly in the status bar ancurrent position symbol in the center of the compass changes tothe target symbol within the compass rose indicates its distancethe center of the compass as you approach the target. When yoposition, the center of the compass is directly over the target sy

NOTE Once you enter Close-up mode, the proximity alarm does noto a position more than 20 meters from the target and then mrange, or you select a different target.

TIP You can turn off the proximity alarm, and all other sounds, by sethe SYS section. For more information, see Configurations.

482ss tab

t this button, thethe new target information,ates and you can use it to

ist of available waypoints andight a waypoint or feature, andure becomes the new target.avigate to the target.

ist are those stored in theata file is open, no features

ected.


Use this button … to …New enter a new target. When you selec

New waypoint form appears. Enterand press e . The screen animnavigate to the target.

List select the target waypoint from the lfeatures in the GeoExplorer 3. Highlpress E . The waypoint or featThe screen animates and you can n

NOTE Features available in the lopen data file. When no dare available.

None indicate that there is no target is sel

483ss tab

screen.

• New waypoint

• Select start


Compass option listn / Compass / mPress m to display the available options for the Compass

The options are:

• Info windows • Select target

• Edit waypoints • Delete waypoints

• Calibration

484ss tab

GeoExplorer 3 compass at lowthe internal compass. To do this:

erence. Calibrating the internal


Calibrationn / Compass / mLocal changes in magnetic fields can affect the accuracy of thespeeds. To take account of local conditions, you must calibrate

1. Highlight Calibration in the Compass options list andpress E. The following screen appears:

2. Follow the instructions and make sure that the antenna ofthe GeoExplorer 3 is level. The antenna is located in thetop portion of the unit under the Trimble logo.

3. PressE, and as the countdown takes place, rotatesmoothly through a full circle.

For best results you should finish facing in the directionthat you started from. A message will be displayedindicating if calibration is successful.

NOTE The compass always points towards the configured North refcompass does not change the north reference.

485

b

n.

rt tab is active. The Chart screen

is tab to navigate to waypointsatures.

m to display theoption list.

More...

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ReferenceNAV section – 21: The Chart ta

21212121 The Chart tab The Chart tab The Chart tab The Chart tabNOTE The Chart tab is not available with the GeoExplorer 3c editio

n / Chart

To display the navigation Chart tab, pressn until the Chaappears:

Use thand fe

PressChart

North

ScaleTarget

indicator

position

Waypoint

Info windows

GPS trail

name

Target

CurrentStart

486

b

Use the Map tab, in the DATAem as targets. Use the Chart

ts.

ows • North indicator

me • Waypoint

More...


The Chart screen displays:

NOTE There are two map screens available on the GeoExplorer 3.section, to view, select, and update features as well as set thtab, in the NAV section, to navigate to features and waypoin

• Current position • GPS trail • Info wind

• Scale • Target • Target na

• Start • Features

487

b

ur current GPS position. Theou are heading.

as in the currently open data

t shows the path you have

screen provide navigationaltab is Current time andws configuration, use thenly displayed if one or more

reen. As you zoom in/out the

rrently set as the start. Whentted line is drawn betweeneen them.urrently set as the target.

More...


Item DescriptionCurrent position The current position cross indicates yo

arrow points in the direction in which yFeatures Features are the points, lines and are

file.GPS trail The GPS trail displays a trail of dots tha

taken.Info windows The Info windows at the bottom of the

information. The default for the ChartCoordinates. To change the Info windoChart option list. The Info window is oitems are selected.

North indicator The “N” arrow indicates north.Scale The scale indicates the scale of the sc

scale changes accordingly.Start The start is the feature or waypoint cu

a start and target are configured, a dothem indicating the shortest path betw

Target The target is the feature or waypoint c

488

b

f the target you are navigatingppears.osition of the waypoints


Target name The target name indicates the name oto. When no target is selected, a “?” a

Waypoint The waypoint symbol represents the pstored on the GeoExplorer 3.

Item Description

489

b

). To activate navigation, select a

rs:

e cursor. For more information,

• None

get that you want to navigate to.

More...


Using the Chart tabUse the Chart tab to navigate to targets (waypoints and featurestarget.

To select a target, pressE . The Select target form appea

The Select target form has three buttons:

NOTE You can also select a target using the Chart option list or thsee Using the cursor.

• New • List

Use this form to select the tar

490

b

you navigate to it. The chartS trail positions, the target, theta collection system. The Infoy relevant information, or

e cross and arrow symbol) toe current position arrow is

se the information displayed one Chart screen to navigate toe selected target.

ordinates

More...


When you select a target, the chart displays information to helpgraphically displays your current position, your heading, the GPbearing to the target, and all waypoints on the GeoExplorer 3 dawindows at the bottom of the screen can be configured to displaremoved completely to increase the chart size.

In this example, you are navigating from the current position (thtarget GPS000 (the cross-flag symbol). The direction in which thpointing indicates your current heading.

Uthth

Target

Current position

Current position co

and direction

Target

Waypoint

of travel

name

491

b

en, a bearing to the target arrowto the target, line up your currentrget, the current position symbolen the current position symbol is

ale of the chart. In the exampleand select Zoom in, Zoom


When the scale is set so that the target is not visible on the screis displayed from your current position to the target. To navigateheading with the bearing to the target. As you get closer to the tagets closer to the target symbol. You have reached the target whover the top of the target symbol.

The scale bar at the bottom of the chart screen indicates the scabove, the scale of the screen is 200 m. To change this, pressmout, or Zoom extents.

For more information, see Chart option list.

492

b

ove the cursor diagonally, presslose to the edge of the chart, the. The cursor remains in the same

tially appears over the target. Iflected, the cursor appears in thecreen.

More...


Using the cursorUse the cursor to select targets and create new waypoints.

To activate the cursor, press an arrow key. The cursor appears:

To move the cursor around the screen, press an arrow key. To mtwo arrow keys at the same time. When the cursor moves too cchart automatically pans in the direction of the cursor movementgeographic position.

CursorThe cursor inino target is secenter of the s

Cursor coordinates

Cursor symbol

493

b

Info windows, these coordinatesoordinates indicates whether thecurrent GPS position of the

nt GPS position of the cursor.

e displayed), the symbol for thatdisplayed beside it. As you moveppear.

waypoint (or feature) isarget form appears with the

to accept the waypoint or

will pan the map one screenremains in the same position on


When the cursor is visible and coordinates are displayed in thereflect the current cursor position. The symbol to the left of the ccoordinates shown are for your current GPS position ( ) or thecursor ( ). In the example above, the symbol shows the curre

NOTE You cannot pan across the screen if the cursor is not visible.

When the cursor is close to a waypoint or feature (if features arwaypoint is highlighted. In addition, the name of the waypoint isthe cursor away from the waypoint, the name and highlight disa

To select a target using the cursor, press an arrow key until thehighlighted and the name appears. Press E . The Select tselected waypoint or feature highlighted in the list. PressEfeature that is highlighted. It becomes the new target.

To remove the cursor, press e .

TIP To pan the screen, press f and one of the arrow keys. Thiswidth in the direction of the arrow key you pressed. The cursorthe screen, not in the same geographic position.

494

b

ew waypointhere you want to create a newt the New button. The New

w waypoint.

e Chart tab.


Using the cursor to create a nUse the arrow keys to move the cursor to a place on the chart wwaypoint. Press E . The Select target form appears. Selecwaypoint form appears. Use it to enter information about the ne

For more information about the Select target form, see Using th

495

b

ents • Info windows

oint • Edit waypoints

More...


Chart option listn / Chart / mPress m to display the Chart options.

The options are:

• Zoom in • Zoom out • Zoom ext

• Pan/select • Select target • New wayp

• Delete waypoints • Select start • Layers

496

b

his magnifies the display byhe bottom of the screenr is active, the screen zoomsnot active, the screen zooms

This lets you see a greaterale at the bottom of the screenr is active, the screen zoomsursor is not active, the screenS position.splays all selected layers. Theg to the layers selected and

, the Zoom extents option

ttom of the screen.

More...


Use this option … to …Zoom in zoom in to the chart screen.

Press m and select Zoom in. Tdecreasing the scale. The scale at tadjusts accordingly. When the cursoin on the cursor. When the cursor isin on the current GPS position.

Zoom out zoom out of the chart screen.Press m and select Zoom out.area by increasing the scale. The scadjusts accordingly. When the cursoout relative to the cursor. When the czooms out relative to the current GP

Zoom extents change the scale so that the chart diZoom extents option varies accordinwhether the features are filtered.If nothing is displayed on the screendoes not affect the chart scale.

Info windows configure the Info windows at the bo

497

b

screen in the direction of thethe cursor to select features

lect a waypoint or a feature as

can select a waypoint or a

More...


Pan/select activate the on-screen cursor.Use the on-screen cursor to pan thecursor movement. You can also useand waypoints on-screen.

Select target access the Select target screen. Sethe target.

New waypoint create a New waypoint.Edit waypoints access the Edit waypoints screen.Delete waypoints access the Delete waypoints list.Select start access the Select start screen. You

feature as the start point.


498

b

hart. Select the Layers option.g layers:

tored in the open data file.displayed on the chart.

ts stored on the GeoExplorer 3.re displayed on the chart.

that shows the path you haveimum of 60 positions. Oldadded.

figured (see Log betweenthat show all positions logged

s that are updated. For line andstart point. For more

.

res in the data file that is

default except Updated.


Layers specify the layers displayed on the cA checklist appears with the followin

• Features – Displays the features sWhen this is selected, features are

• Waypoints – Displays the waypoinWhen this is selected, waypoints a

• GPS trail – Displays a trail of dotstaken. The trail shows up to a maxpositions drop off as new ones are

• Between feature GPS – When confeatures), a trail of small crossesbetween features is displayed.

Layers(continued)

• Updated – Displays a ✓ on featurearea features the ✓ appears at theinformation, see The Update tab

NOTE You can only display featucurrently open.

NOTE All layers are selected by


499

warewarewarewarelete GeoExplorer 3 orsers who want to:

rer 3 firmware option, or vice

new version

are

e

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide22: Installing the firmware

Reference

22222222 Installing the firmInstalling the firmInstalling the firmInstalling the firmYou do not need to install the firmware if you received the compGeoExplorer 3c data collection system. This section is only for u

• change the GeoExplorer 3c firmware option to the GeoExploversa

• upgrade the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmware to a

• install or reinstall the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmw

The following instructions cover:

• Equipment required for installation

• Upgrading the GeoExplorer 3c to GeoExplorer 3 firmwar

• Installing the GeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmware

500

nstallationlorer 3 data collector, a programlash is an installation program.

3 firmware, from the Trimble webld Wide Web, contact your local

ctor you need the following

Windows 98, Windows 2000,al RS232 port and at least 10 MB

ter has a 25-pin serial port

More...


Reference

Equipment required for iBefore installing the GeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExpcalled WinFlash must be installed on your office computer. WinFThe WinFlash software is available, along with the GeoExplorersite (www.trimble.com). If you do not have access to the WorTrimble dealer to receive the GeoExplorer 3 installation disks.

To use the WinFlash software with the GeoExplorer 3 data colleequipment:

• an IBM-compatible personal computer running Windows 95,Windows ME, or Windows NT, with at least one available seriof free hard disk space.

• your GeoExplorer 3 data collector

• a 9-pin to 25-pin converter (this is only required if your compuconnector on its COM1 or COM2 ports)


http://www.trimble.com

501

ernal source of power for thehe GeoExplorer 3. Alternatively,l clip, but you should make sure

Web)

efore you start to perform thesubstitute other equipment. Byctions provided in this section,If you use inappropriateu will be unable to install thee risk of erasing the currently increased. If this occurs, youing.

grade can be accomplished by3, it is recommended that youource of power. This preventsff a discharged battery.

have transferred any data filesfiles will be deleted.


Reference

• a Trimble GeoExplorer 3 support module to provide an extinstallation process, rather than using the internal battery of tyou can upgrade the firmware using the GeoExplorer 3 Seriathat the internal battery is at least 50% charged.

• CD-ROM drive (if you do not have access to the World Wide

CAUTION It is crucial that you have all of the equipment listed above boption upgrade or to install the firmware. Do not attempt tousing the recommended equipment and following the instruyou will be able to quickly and reliably perform the process.equipment, or fail to follow the instructions, it is likely that yofirmware or upgrade the options successfully. In addition, thfirmware in your GeoExplorer 3 without replacing it, is greatmay need to return your GeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servic

Although the GeoExplorer 3 firmware installation and option upusing power from the internal lithium battery of the GeoExploreruse the Trimble GeoExplorer 3 support module as an external saccidental termination of the installation process while running o

CAUTION Before you start the installation process, make sure that youand waypoints to your office computer. If you do not, these

502

rer 3c to

the GeoExplorer 3 support

he GeoExplorer 3 lithium battery)


Reference

Upgrading the GeoExploGeoExplorer 3 firmwareFollow the instructions below to perform either of the following:

• an Option upgrade with an external power source (usingmodule)

• an Option upgrade with the internal power source (using t

503

al power

dule as an external power

nstallation:

More...


Reference

Option upgrade with an externsourceTo perform an option install using the GeoExplorer 3 support mosource:

1. Connect the equipment listed in Equipment required for i

504

t (mains).

r COM2 serial port of yourr 18532).

er 3 support module.

ot already on. Check the Statuspowered externally:

ding with the option upgrade.


Reference

2. Plug the GeoExplorer 3 support module into the wall curren

3. Connect the GeoExplorer 3 support module to the COM1 ocomputer using the supplied null modem cable (part numbe

4. Place your GeoExplorer 3 data collector into the GeoExplor

5. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and office computer if they are nscreen on the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being

You are now ready to option upgrade the firmware. See Procee

505

nal power

ium battery as the power source:

the rear of the GeoExplorer 3

More...


Reference

Option upgrade with the intersourceTo perform an option install using the GeoExplorer 3 internal lith

1. Connect the serial clip (part number 38595-00) to swipes ondata collector.

506

32) to the serial clip. Connect theerial port of your computer.

ot already on. Check the Statuspowered internally:

ding with the option upgrade.


Reference

2. Connect one end of the null modem cable (part number 185other end of the null modem cable to the COM1 or COM2 s


You are now ready to option upgrade the firmware. See Procee

507

grade

on and select Reset. The

More...


Reference

Proceeding with the option upTo proceed with the option upgrade:

1. On the GeoExplorer 3, go to the Setup tab in the SYS sectifollowing menu appears:

508

ction. You can begin the option

this, from the Windows Start

, which is used to install thetor, must be installed on yourwant to install. The WinFlashm www.trimble.com, or

More...


Reference

2. Select Upgrade firmware. You will be asked to confirm this aupgrade when the following screen appears:

3. On your office computer, start the WinFlash software. To domenu select Programs / WinFlash / WinFlash.

NOTE For the firmware upgrade to proceed, the WinFlash programGeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExplorer 3 data collecoffice computer, along with the GeoExplorer 3 firmware youprogram and GeoExplorer 3 firmware can be downloaded froinstalled from the installation CD.

www.trimble.com

509

More...


Reference

A dialog similar to the following appears:

4. Select GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector as the device type.

510

nnected to.

More...


Reference

5. Specify the serial (COM) port that your GeoExplorer 3 is co

6. Click Next. The Operation Selection dialog appears:

511

More...


Reference

7. Select the Option upgrade option and click Next.

The following dialog appears:

512

ovided by Trimble and click Next.

lar to the following:

More...


Reference

8. Enter the password exactly (including matching case) as pr

The GeoExplorer 3 Firmware Selection dialog appears simi

513

oExplorer 3 and click Next.

:

More...


Reference

9. Select the firmware version you want to install onto your Ge

The Settings Review dialog appears similar to the following

514

nitiates communication with the

ress status of the firmware

fer of the GeoExplorer 3

More...


Reference

10. Review the current settings and click Finish. The program iGeoExplorer 3.

A dialog similar to the following appears, indicating the proginstallation:

The installation takes about five minutes. Typically, the transfirmware to the data collector proceeds automatically.

515

pears on your computer:

wly installed firmware.

fying the new GeoExplorer 3

the GeoExplorer 3 once it hasou may need to return your


Reference

When the installation has completed, the following dialog ap

11. Click Exit to close the WinFlash program.

12. Your GeoExplorer 3 reboots and automatically starts the ne

The Trimble logo screen appears just after rebooting, identifirmware and also showing the firmware version number.

WARNING Do not stop the option upgrade process on the computer orstarted. Doing so may corrupt the firmware. If this occurs, yGeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servicing.

516

r 3 or

e onto the GeoExplorer 3 datato install a new version of the

nternal power source, as

sing the GeoExplorer 3 support

sing the GeoExplorer 3 lithium

tents of the GeoExplorer 3 datapoints are transferred to your


Reference

Installing the GeoExploreGeoExplorer 3c firmwareThis section describes how to install the GeoExplorer 3 firmwarcollector. (You should also follow these instructions if you wantGeoExplorer 3c firmware.)

You can perform the installation using either an external or the idescribed in the following sections:

• Installing the firmware using an external power source (umodule)

• Installing the firmware using the internal power source (ubattery)

CAUTION The firmware installation process completely erases the concollector’s memory. Make sure that all data files and waycomputer before installing the firmware.

517

n external

upport module as an external

More...


Reference

Installing the firmware using apower sourceTo install the GeoExplorer 3 firmware using the GeoExplorer 3 ssource of power:

1. Connect the equipment listed inEquipment required for installation:

2. Plug the GeoExplorer 3 supportmodule in to the wall current (mains).

3. Connect the GeoExplorer 3 supportmodule to the COM1 or COM2 serialport of the computer using the suppliednull modem cable (part number18532).

4. Place your GeoExplorer 3 datacollector into the GeoExplorer 3support module.

518

ady on. Check the Status screend externally:

the installation.


Reference

5. Turn on the GeoExplorer 3 and computer if they are not alreon the GeoExplorer 3 to make sure the unit is being powere

You are now ready to install the firmware. See Proceeding with

519

he internal

attery of the GeoExplorer 3 as

More...


Reference

Installing the firmware using tpower sourceTo install the GeoExplorer 3 firmware using the internal lithium bthe power source:

1. Connect the equipmentlisted in Equipmentrequired for installationas shown in the followingdiagram:

2. Connect one end of the nullmodem cable (part number18532) to the serial clip.Connect the other end ofthe null modem cable to theCOM1 or COM2 serial portof your computer.

520

ot already on. Check the Statuspowered internally:

the installation.


Reference


You are now ready to install the firmware. See Proceeding with

521

nt. The following menu appears:

More...


Reference

Proceeding with the installatio1. On the GeoExplorer 3, go to the Setup tab and select Rese

522

on. Begin the option upgrade

this, from the Windows Start

re, which is used to install thetor, must be installed onto yourwant to install. The WinFlashm www.trimble.com, or

More...


Reference

2. Select Upgrade firmware. You are asked to confirm this actiwhen the following screen appears:

3. On your office computer, start the WinFlash software. To domenu select Programs / WinFlash / WinFlash.

NOTE For the firmware installation to proceed, the WinFlash softwaGeoExplorer 3 firmware onto your GeoExplorer 3 data collecoffice computer, along with the GeoExplorer 3 firmware youprogram and GeoExplorer 3 firmware can be downloaded froinstalled from the installation CD.

www.trimble.com

523

More...


Reference

A dialog similar to the following appears:

4. Select GeoExplorer 3 Data Collector as the device type.

524

nnected to.

More...


Reference

5. Specify the serial (COM) port that your GeoExplorer 3 is co

6. Click Next. The Operation Selection dialog appears:

525

lar to the following:

More...


Reference

7. Select the Firmware upgrade option and click Next.

The GeoExplorer 3 Firmware Selection dialog appears simi

526

oExplorer 3 and click Next.

:

More...


Reference

8. Select the firmware version you want to install onto your Ge

The Settings Review dialog appears similar to the following

527

nitiates communication with the

ress status of the firmware

fer of the GeoExplorer 3

More...


Reference

9. Review the current settings and click Finish. The program iGeoExplorer 3.

A dialog similar to the following appears, indicating the proginstallation:

The installation takes about five minutes. Typically, the transfirmware to the data collector proceeds automatically.

528

pears on your computer:

wly installed firmware.

fying the new GeoExplorer 3

omputer or the GeoExplorer 3is occurs you may need to return


Reference

When the installation has completed, the following dialog ap

10. Click Exit to close the WinFlash program.

11. Your GeoExplorer 3 reboots and automatically starts the ne

The Trimble logo screen appears just after rebooting, identifirmware and also showing the firmware version number.

WARNING Do not stop the firmware installation process on the office conce it has started. Doing so may corrupt the firmware. If thyour GeoExplorer 3 to Trimble for servicing.

529
GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide23: Specifications
Reference

23232323 SpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsThe following tables detail the pinouts for the:

• GeoExplorer 3 serial clip

• GeoExplorer 3 support module


• Data/power splitter cable

• RTCM/NMEA splitter cable

530

-00):


Reference

GeoExplorer 3 serial clipThis table lists the pinouts for the serial clip (part number 38595

DB9 pin # Clip pin # Signal

1 EXT IN

2 3 TXD1 →3 2 RXD1 ←4 NC

5 6 GND

6 NC

7 8 RXD2 ←8 7 TXD2 →9 9 NC

531

odule38604-00):


Reference

GeoExplorer 3 support mThis table lists the pinouts for the support module (part number

DB9 pin # Module pin # Signal

1 EXT IN

2 3 TXD1 →3 2 RXD1 ←4 NC

5 5 GND

6 NC

7 8 RXD2 ←8 7 TXD2 →9 9 NC

532

er 18532):


Reference

Null modem cableThis table lists the pinouts for the null modem cable (part numb

Pin # Signal Pin # Signal

1 EVENT IN → 1 CD

2 TXD ← 3 RXD

3 RXD → 2 TXD

45 GND 5 GND

6 DSR ← 6 DSR

7 PWR ON → 8 RTS8 CHG CTRL → 7 DTR

533

number 39183):

le)


Reference

Data/power splitter cableThis table lists the pinouts for the data/power splitter cable (part

Pin # P1 (DB9 Female) P2 (DB9 Male) P3 (Fema

1 GP10 NC -

2 RXA → RXA → -

3 TXA ← TXA ← -

4 NC NC -

5 GND GND GND

6 NC NC -

7 RTSA/TXB → RTSA/TXB → -

8 CTSA/RXB ← CTSA/RXB ← -9 EXT PWR NC EXT PWR

534

leart number 39142):

Pin # P2 (DE9 Male)

5 GND

3 TX2 ←2 RX2 →


Reference

RTCM/NMEA splitter cabThis table lists the pinouts for the RTCM/NMEA splitter cable (p

Pin # P3 (DE9 Female) Pin # P1 (DE9 Male)

2 RX1 → 2 RX1 →3 TX1 ← 3 TX1 ←5 GND 5 GND

7 TX2 ←8 RX2 →9 9

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting 535

V: V: V: V: TROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGTROUBLESHOOTINGThis section lists potential problems and describes how to solve them. It also lists the messagesthat can appear on the screen of the GeoExplorer 3 handheld. Each list is arranged inalphabetical order.

• Potential problems

• GeoExplorer 3 messages

536

sssse GeoExplorer 3 data collector.

s.

en postprocessing

e incorrect

e minute of being turned on

tes of being turned on

fter being turned on

s expected

eceiver with the GeoExplorer 3

24: Potential problemsGeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting

24242424 Potential problemPotential problemPotential problemPotential problemListed here are problems that you may encounter when using thSelect one from the list to view its possible causes and solution

• Automatically generated Time attributes are incorrect

• Cannot differentially correct the rover GPS positions wh

• Coordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 appear to b

• GeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS position within on

• GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites within three minu

• GeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off immediately a

• The GeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to read

• The internal compass does not appear to be working

• The precision of recorded GPS positions is less than wa

• The real-time differential correction link is not working

• You are having problems using Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) r

537

rect

e Time zone field (in themenu).

generated file names areUTC time, not local time.

outside and check that it canlite.r 3 is not tracking satellitesf being turned on.


Automatically generated Time attributes are incor

Possible cause FixThe internal clock of theGeoExplorer 3 is set incorrectly.

Reset it by adjusting thFormats configuration

NOTE Automaticallyderived from

The GeoExplorer 3 has notreceived GPS time yet.

Take the GeoExplorer 3track at least one satelIf not, see GeoExplorewithin three minutes o

538

ons when postprocessing

t the Elevation mask on theh. The rover must only usevisible to the Base station.

re other Base files collectedt base file.

use Base station data from

e Base file is started befored stopped after the rover file


Cannot differentially correct the rover GPS positi

Possible cause FixThe rover unit used satellites thatwere not visible to the basestation.

In future make sure tharover is set high enougsatellites that are also

The Base station file started toolate or too soon.

Check to see if there aadjacent to your currenorCheck to see if you cananother provider.orIn future, make sure ththe rover is started, anhas been closed.

539

ar to be incorrect

e sure that the correct datum

ify the correct zone and

mmonly used in the USA:3.

ify the correct coordinatee units.ordinate systems.

More...


Coordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3 appe

Possible cause FixYou are using the Latitude/Longitude coordinatesystem and have selectedthe wrong datum.

Check Coordinates and makis selected.

You are using the UTMcoordinate system and haveselected the wrong UTMzone or datum.

Check Coordinates and specdatum.

NOTE Two datums are coNAD-27 and NAD-8

You have selected thewrong coordinate system,zone, or coordinate units.

Check Coordinates and specsystem, zone, and coordinatFor more information, see Co

540

ordinate system, datum, and/that values such as the scale(as a parts-per-million value),the correct sense (a positive

), and that Latitudes andhe correct hemisphere (North/ively).


You have defined a customcoordinate system, datum,and/or zone incorrectlyusing the CoordinateSystem Manager in the GPSPathfinder Office software.

Check the definition of the coor zone carefully. Make surefactor are specified correctlythat rotations are specified inrotation is counter-clockwiseLongitudes are specified in tSouth or East/West, respect

Possible cause Fix

541

ithin one minute of being

ar view of the sky

o check that there arehis time, and that they are not

to adjust the configured GPS

o check that the current PDOPigured mask.

to adjust the configured GPS

More...


GeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS position wturned on

Possible cause FixNot enough satellites areavailable. A minimum of four isrequired to compute GPSpositions.

Ensure you have a cleorUse mission planning tsufficient satellites at tobstructed from view.orUse the GPS slider barprecision.

The current PDOP value is toohigh. (The geometry of thesatellite constellation is poor)

Use mission planning tvalue is below the conforUse the GPS slider barprecision.

542

to check if the Mode field isnly. When the GeoExplorer 3only and there is no real-time

are displayed or recorded.


There is no real-time link. Use the Real-time formconfigured for RTCM ois configured for RTCMlink, no GPS positions

Possible cause Fix

543

ee minutes of being

tion and move away from it.y be a building, tree, or

not work indoors.

ab or Status bar to make suretenna is connected andthe GeoExplorer 3 still fails totenna and/or antenna cable

viced.

rnal antenna is not workingeoExplorer 3 reverts to the

ntenna.

More...


GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites within thrturned on

Possible cause FixSatellites are being obstructed. Identify the obstruc

The obstruction mavehicle.

NOTE GPS does

The external antenna (or antennacable) has not been connected, hasbeen connected incorrectly, or isfaulty.

Check The Status tthat the external anworking properly. Iftrack signals, the anmay need to be ser

NOTE If the exteproperly Ginternal a

544

inutes) until therds an Almanac.


The almanac is too old. TheGeoExplorer 3 has not recorded andstored a current almanac.

Wait (for up to 15 mGeoExplorer 3 reco

Possible cause Fix

545

iately after being turned

ower source or use an

of the system.


GeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off immedon

Possible cause

Possible cause FixThe internal power source is notcharged.

Recharge the internal pexternal power source.

The GeoExplorer 3 firmware haslocked up and is not responding toany keys.

Perform a Warm boot

546

direct sunlight and wait untilal.

vel. Use the The Status tab oral power is low, recharge theower source with the

.

ness.


The GeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to read

Possible cause FixThe screen has been left indirect sunlight.

Remove the handheld fromthe screen returns to norm

The GeoExplorer 3 internalpower source is low.

Check the internal power lethe Status bar. If the internbattery or use an external pGeoExplorer 3 handheld.

The screen display contrastneeds adjusting.

Adjust the Screen contrast

The screen backlight needsadjusting.

Adjust the Backlight bright

547

ing

from the Compass option list

o be held with the antennaplay accurate readings. Thele logo.


The internal compass does not appear to be work

Possible cause FixThe compass has not beencalibrated, or needs to bere-calibrated.

Use the Calibration optionto calibrate the compass.

The GeoExplorer 3 is notbeing held in a level position.

The GeoExplorer 3 needs tlevel for the compass to disantenna is under the Trimb

548

han was expected

o increase the minimumquired (for a point feature).

ctions, such as buildings andto record features. Use anilable.

for use with postprocessingder Office Differential

, use the Velocity filter optionf multipath.

ar.

More...


The precision of recorded GPS positions is less t

Possible cause FixYou did not record sufficientpositions to achieve the requiredprecision (for a point feature).

Use Feature settings tnumber of positions re

You are operating in an area ofhigh multipath interference.

Move away from obstrutrees, and use Offsetsexternal antenna if avaorLog velocities records(using the GPS PathfinCorrection utility).orIf operating in real-timeto reduce the effects o

The GPS slider bar is set too low. Adjust the GPS slider b

549

or move the GPS slider to the

k and/or Elevation mask orthe right.

.

ble, specify a minimum of fourompute a 3D position. Smallin the 2D altitude can lead to

r horizontal inaccuracy.


The PDOP mask is too high. Lower the PDOP maskright.

The SNR mask and/or Elevationmask is too low.

Increase the SNR masmove the GPS slider to

The GeoExplorer 3 is configuredto use a minimum of threesatellites and the 2D altitudespecified is not accurate.

Change the 2D altitude

NOTE Where possisatellites to cinaccuraciesmuch greate

Possible cause Fix

550

rking

the Status bar to check ifre being received. Make sureappropriate cable for the radionnected properly. If in doubt,outs (see GeoExplorer 3

o change the RTCM input andlt the documentation for yourrameters.

setting.

More...


The real-time differential correction link is not wo

Possible cause FixThe RTCM connection is notconnected, has been connectedincorrectly, or is faulty.

Use The Status tab orreal-time corrections athat you are using theand that the cable is cocheck the serial clip pinserial clip).

The RTCM communicationparameters are configuredincorrectly.

Use the COMMS form toutput settings. Consuradio for the correct pa

The Station ID is incorrect. Change the Station ID

551

ake sure the RTCM input fieldB. Also, check that the BoBbled for cable-free

information, refer to the) Receiver Manual.

splitter is not being used inNMEA output off.


The GeoExplorer 3 is notreceiving corrections from theBoB receiver via the cable-freelink.

In the COMMS form mis set to Cable-free Boreceiver has been enatransmission. For moreBeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB

NMEA output is set to the samedevice as RTCM input.

When the RTCM/NMEAthe COMMS form, turn

Possible cause Fix

552

(BoB) receiver with the

sing the BoB receiver with the

Beacon-on-a-Belt (BoB)

o change the frequency beinge corrections.

3 closer to the BoB receiver.


You are having problems using Beacon-on-a-BeltGeoExplorer 3

NOTE There may be other reasons why you are having problems uGeoExplorer 3.

For more information, refer to the troubleshooting section in theReceiver Manual.

Possible cause FixThe BoB receiver is set to thewrong frequency.

Use the BoB receiver tused to receive real-tim

The BoB receiver is too far awaywhen operating using thecable-free link.

Move the GeoExplorer

553

ssagesssagesssagesssagesrmation messages that may beiven to help you avoid seeing

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Troubleshooting25: GeoExplorer 3 messages

25252525 GeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meGeoExplorer 3 meThis section lists the GeoExplorer 3 error, confirmation, and infodisplayed, and their causes. Where relevant, suggestions are gthese messages in the future.

• Error!

• Please confirm...

• Other messages

554

gs

ange the mode. You cannot viewode. To change mode, use the

elect Standard.

oints stored on thewaypoints using the option list inwant to save any waypoints first,

a data file is open

ta file is open or data transfer isis completed, then attempt the

More...


Error!Cannot change mode with custom settin

While in the Custom mode of the GPS slider bar, you tried to chthe Standard mode of the GPS slider bar if you are in Custom marrow keys to highlight the slider bar. Then press m and s

Cannot exceed 1000 waypoints

You attempted to create a waypoint when the limit of 1000 waypGeoExplorer 3 had been reached. You can delete unnecessarythe The Road tab, The Compass tab, or The Chart tab. If youyou can transfer them to your office computer.

Compass calibration cannot proceed ifor data transfer is occurring

You are attempting to calibrate the internal compass while a daoccurring. Close any open data files and wait until data transfercalibration.

555

cannot be deleted

the GeoExplorer 3. Delete the

ntly open for edit int complete any changes, then

ory than is available on thery Editor utility in the GPSata Dictionary Editor utility, refer

file. All file names and identifiersr lower) is not significant when

More...


<Dictionary file name> is in use and

A data dictionary cannot be deleted if it is used by a data file ondata file before deleting the dictionary.

Data dictionary currently in use

You have tried to open a file using a data dictionary that is curreThe Setup tab. To open a file using this dictionary you must firsclose the dictionary, before opening your file.

Data dictionary too large to edit

You have tried to open a data dictionary that requires more memGeoExplorer 3. To edit the data dictionary use the Data DictionaPathfinder Office software. For more information on using the Dto the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

Duplicate file names are not allowed

You have attempted to give a file the same name as an existingon the GeoExplorer 3 must have a unique name. Case (upper ocomparing two names.

556

ithin the specified range.

d

have not entered one.

successful. Make sure that theis enough memory on

r was unsuccessful. Make surend that there is enough memory

g transferred to your officecomputer. Either cancel the dataete before opening/deleting the

More...


<field>: out of range “min” to “max”

The number entered is too large or too small. Enter a number w

<field/attribute name>: Entry require

You are editing a field or attribute that requires a value, but you

Failed to load configuration file

The transfer of a configuration file to the office computer was unconfiguration file is valid and it contains no errors, and that thereGeoExplorer 3.

Failed to load coordinate system

The transfer of a coordinate system file from the office computethat the coordinate system file is valid and contains no errors, aon the GeoExplorer 3.

File in use by data transfer

You have attempted to open or delete a file that is currently beincomputer or is being overwritten by an transfer from your officetransfer from your office computer or wait until transfer is compldata file.

557

tion

ounds of the configuredve selected the appropriatethe coordinate correctly (pay

custom coordinate system and/um, and/or zone correctly.

in the correct format as

in the correct format ashour format. If using the 12 hour

when less than 10 KB of dataemory is left. To create memory

More...


Inappropriate location for map projec

You have entered a coordinate (North/East) that is outside the bcoordinate system zone. Use Coordinates to check that you hacoordinate system and zone. Make sure that you have enteredparticular attention to the hemisphere—N, S, E, or W). If using aor zone, make sure that you defined the coordinate system, dat

Invalid date

The date entered is invalid. Make sure that you entered the dateconfigured in Formats.

Invalid time

The time entered is invalid. Make sure that you entered the timeconfigured in Formats. You can enter time in either the 12 or 24clock, remember to specify pm if the time is after midday.

Memory nearly full

This warning message appears if you try to create or open a filestorage space remains. Use The Status tab to see how much mspace, use The File tab to delete data files.

558

arge

displayed on the GeoExplorer 3.

If this message appears, youcoordinate system.

fore upgrading

low power supply. To proceedower connected. The upgrade

res based on logging time, andect Start and End times.

ed. Typically, three windows canlected you can only display onebefore closing the list.

More...


<number>: Floating point number too l

The numeric value entered in a field is too large to be stored or

The GeoExplorer 3 can store and display large numeric values.have probably entered a wrong value or coordinate in the wrong

Please charge the internal battery be

You are attempting to upgrade the firmware while the unit has awith the upgrade, place the unit in the support module with the pcan take place when the power level has reached 10%.

Start time is later than end time

This message appears when the GeoExplorer 3 is filtering featuthe specified End time is not later than the Start time. Enter corr

Too many info windows selected

You have selected more Info window options than can be displaybe displayed at once. However, if Coordinates or Go N/E are seother Info window. Reduce the number of Info windows selected

559

eek old

ago. Create a new data file to

a file is open

ata file is open. Before enteringkey in the DATA section to close

, presso to place the

t coordinate system

the boundaries of the currentappropriate coordinate systemPay particular attention to the

and/or zone, make sure thatrrectly.

te system transferred from theM coordinate systems have aOffice Help.

More...


Unable to append to a file over one w

You attempted to log data to a file created more than one weekcollect data.

Unable to go to standby mode if a dat

You have attempted to place the unit in Standby mode while a dStandby mode all data files must first be closed. Use theeany open features and then the file itself. Once the file is closedGeoExplorer 3 in Standby mode.

Warning! Position is out of the currenboundaries

You attempted to enter or display a geographic position outsidecoordinate system. Use Coordinates to see if you selected theand zone. Make sure that you entered the coordinate correctly.hemisphere—N, S, E, or W. If using a custom coordinate systemyou have defined the coordinate system, datum, and/or zone co

This message is most likely to appear when you use a coordinaGPS Pathfinder Office software, as the default Lat/Long and UTglobal scope. For more information, refer to the GPS Pathfinder

560

d. Operation not

y the office software. Thee password, check the passwordutility.

n that can be displayed by the


You have entered an incorrect passworallowed.

The field you have tried to change has been password locked bpassword you have entered is incorrect. If you have forgotten thsettings for your Configuration file in the Configuration Manager

Zoom limit reached

You have reached the maximum or minimum zoom magnificatiomap or chart.

561

r form. Select No to cancel the

x but retain any other loggedosition.

en. Select No to cancel the close

lts?

factory default values. Select No

ile (base or rover) is open. If youset the values.

More...


Please confirm...Abandon changes?

Select Yes to discard any changes made to the open attribute ooperation and return to the form without losing your changes.

Abandon vertex?

Select Yes to abandon the positions logged for the current verteinformation. Select No to resume logging the averaged vertex p

Close rover file?

Select Yes to close and save the rover file you currently have opoperation and leave the rover file open.

Close file and reset to factory defau

Select Yes to reset the GeoExplorer 3 data collection system toto cancel the operation.

The GeoExplorer 3 cannot be reset to factory defaults if a data fselect Yes, the GeoExplorer 3 will close the file first and then re

562

plorer 3. Select No to cancel the

d on the GeoExplorer 3. Select

the operation.

the operation.

e>?

ancel the operation.

e operation.More...


Delete all?

Select Yes to delete all waypoints that are stored on the GeoExoperation.

NOTE If a waypoint is set as the start or target, it is not deleted.

Delete all files?

Select Yes to delete all data files (rover and base) that are storeNo to cancel the operation.

Delete attribute <attribute name>?

Select Yes to delete the selected attribute. Select No to cancel

Delete base file <filename>?

Select Yes to delete the selected base file. Select No to cancel

Delete dictionary <dictionary filenam

Select Yes to delete the selected data dictionary. Select No to c

Delete feature <feature name>?

Select Yes to delete the selected feature. Select No to cancel th

563

operation.

l the operation.

operation.

the operation.

stance: Replace GPS

t position is further from theing distance. Select Yes toelect No to cancel the operation.

More...


Delete geoid?

Select Yes to delete the specified geoid. Select No to cancel the

Delete rover file <filename>?

Select Yes to delete the selected Rover file. Select No to cance

Delete value <value name>?

Select Yes to delete the selected value. Select No to cancel the

Delete waypoint <waypoint name>?

Select Yes to delete the selected waypoint. Select No to cancel

Distance to feature exceeds warning didata anyway?

You are updating the GPS position of a feature and your currenfeature’s previously recorded position than the configured Warnoverwrite the previous position with the current GPS position. S

564

will delete all

in Upgrade mode for installationalling new firmware will delete allpgrade and return to

red to the PC:

puter. If you delete it from thee selected file. Select No to

ase data, and the amount of datae the file. Select No to continue

More...


Enter upgrade mode? (Firmware upgradedata files)

Select Yes to enter Upgrade mode. The GeoExplorer 3 must beof different firmware versions using the WinFlash software. Instfiles on the GeoExplorer 3. Select No to abandon the firmware uThe Setup tab.

File <filename> has not been transferDelete anyway?

The selected data file has not been transferred to the office comGeoExplorer 3, it will not be recoverable. Select Yes to delete thcancel the operation.

Insufficient carrier: Close anyway?

You have attempted to close a data file that is logging carrier phrequired (10 minutes) has not been collected. Select Yes to closcollecting carrier-phase data.

565

nt to store this

GeoExplorer 3 could record theature anyway. Select No to

nt to store this

xplorer 3 could record theanyway. Select No to continue

t to abandon this

xplorer 3 could record any GPSthe vertex open to record GPS

except Latitude/Longitude and

More...


Insufficient GPS positions: Do you wafeature now?

You have attempted to close the current point feature before theconfigured Minimum positions. Select Yes to store the point fecontinue collecting positions for the selected feature.

Insufficient GPS positions: Do you wavertex now?

You have attempted to close the current vertex before the GeoEconfigured Minimum positions. Select Yes to store the vertexcollecting positions for the vertex.

No GPS positions recorded: Do you wanvertex now?

You have attempted to close the current vertex before the GeoEpositions. Select Yes to abandon the vertex. Select No to keeppositions.

Reset coordinate systems?

Select Yes to remove all coordinates loaded on GeoExplorer 3,UTM. Select No to cancel the operation.

566

file. Select No to continue

ame>?

t GPS position. Select No to


Stop base station?

Select Yes to stop logging base station data and close the baselogging data.

Update GPS data in feature <feature n

Select Yes to replace the previous GPS position with the currencancel the operation.

567

e compass screen without

heading under local conditions.ptions list. The internal compassns at low velocities. For more

close the message. For more

menu using this combination of

More...


Other messagesCalibration failed, Try again?

Select Yes to attempt calibration again. Select No to return to thcalibrating the compass.

Calibrate digital compass

The internal compass requires calibration to return an accurateTo calibrate the compass, select Calibration from the Compass oaffects the use of the Skyplot, Road, Chart, and Compass screeinformation, see Using the Compass tab.

Calibration successful

You have successfully calibrated the compass. PressE toinformation, see Using the Compass tab.

f + m to display the main menu

For an overview of the GeoExplorer 3 system, access the mainkeys.

568

ameters you specified.

osition is available. (This occurs,or.)

ified parameters.

further operation is suspendedels the current task.

closed properly because of a

More...


No match found!

The software cannot find a feature that matches the search par

Not found

No features matching the search criteria have been found.

OLD position

This message flashes over the GPS position if no current GPS pfor example, if there are too few satellites or the geometry is po

Please wait... Filtering

The GeoExplorer 3 is filtering the features according to the spec

Please wait... Processing

The GeoExplorer 3 has a large amount of processing to do anduntil the current task is completed. Pressing fe canc

Please wait... Rebuilding file

The GeoExplorer 3 is checking and repairing files that were notsudden power failure or similar event.

569

ecified parameters.

parameters.

igured on the GPS slider bar.

sition.

o the PC: Continue?

on the GeoExplorer 3 will beware upgrade. You may transfer

More...


Please wait... Searching

The GeoExplorer 3 is searching the features according to the sp

Please wait... Sorting

GeoExplorer 3 is sorting the features according to the specified

Poor geometry

The current satellite geometry does not meet the precision conf

The current PDOP is higher than the configured PDOP mask.

Remain stationary

Remain stationary while you are logging an averaged vertex po

Some files have not been transferred t

Select Yes to continue with the firmware upgrade. All data filespermanently deleted. Select No if you want to abandon the firmthe necessary files and then upgrade your firmware.

570

ion configured on the GPS slider

n the configured SNR mask.

son. If this message persistsserviced.

down power key to

f you have not done so already,Flash to upgrade the firmware ton the power keyo for

e entered for the current feature.

on form and then press e.

More...


Too few satellites

The number of satellites being tracked does not meet the precisbar.

There are too few satellites with an SNR value that is higher tha

Undefined GPS error

The GeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellites for an unknown reaplease contact your Trimble dealer to have the GPS equipment

Upgrading firmware from WinFlash (Holdabort)

The GeoExplorer 3 is now able to communicate with Winflash. Iconnect the GeoExplorer 3 to your office computer and run Wina different version. If you want to abandon the upgrade hold dowapproximately 10 seconds. Restart using the power keyo.

Validating

The GeoExplorer 3 is validating the attribute values that you hav

This message also appears if you change fields in a configurati

571

vertex you collected.


Vertex open

You are currently logging an averaged vertex.

Vertex stored

This message confirms that you have now saved the averaged

572

real-time differential GPSrover

n RTCMtrue north

L) UTCUTMvelocityVTG messagewaypointWGS-84

ber

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Glossary

GLOSSARYGLOSSARYGLOSSARYGLOSSARYSelect a word from the following list to view its definition.

.cor file datum latitude

.imp file declination longitude

.ssf file differential correction magnetic declinatioalmanac ellipsoid magnetic northattributes feature Mean Sea Level (MSaveraged vertex geoid multipathbase station GGA message NAD-27baud great-circle distance NAD-83bearing HAE NMEAcarrier phase heading paritycode phase (C/A code) horizon postprocessingdata dictionary ionospheric noise pseudorandom num

573

tial Correction utility in the GPS


.cor fileA file with a .cor extension that has been created by the DifferenPathfinder Office software, but uses the .ssf file format.

574

rt utility in the GPS Pathfinder


.imp fileA file with an .imp extension that has been created by the ImpoOffice software, but uses the .ssf file format.

575

PS data from a mapping


.ssf fileA Trimble Standard Storage Format (SSF) data file that stores Greceiver.

576

es orbit information on all the. The almanac is stored on theignals when you turn theare trying to regain GPS signals.


almanacAn almanac is data, transmitted by a GPS satellite, which includsatellites, clock corrections, and atmospheric delay parametersGeoExplorer 3. It is used to facilitate rapid acquisition of GPS sGeoExplorer 3 on, or when you have lost track of satellites and

577

formation System (GIS). Force type, width, or a number ofd could have a range of possible

tribute value. In our example of aute and ASPHALT could be the


attributesAttributes are the characteristics of a feature in a Geographic Inexample, a road may have a name or designation number, surfalanes. Each of these factors are attributes of the road feature, anvalues.

The value chosen to describe a particular feature is called the atroad feature, PINE ROAD could be the name value of the attribsurface type attribute.

578

ore GPS positions.


averaged vertexA point on a line or area feature that is averaged from one or m

579

nown location specifically toollected at the same time as youtions that collect base data forwn coordinates for the duration


base stationA base station is a GPS antenna and receiver positioned on a kcollect data for differential correction. Base data needs to be ccollect data on a rover unit. Base stations can be permanent staprovision to multiple users, or a rover unit that you locate on knoof your datalogging session.

580

nsmissions, generally one bit per. However, both the input and

a to be successfully transferred.


baudBaud is a unit used to measure the speed of electronic code trasecond. The higher the baud rate, the faster the transfer of dataoutput device must be configured to the same baud rate for dat

581

sured clockwise from north. Oncurrent position to the target


bearingA bearing is the direction from one point to another, usually meathe GeoExplorer 3, the bearing indicates the direction from yourwaypoint or feature.

582

enerated by your GeoExplorer 3r phase is used to very

the accuracy of your position.


carrier phaseCarrier phase is the difference between the radio wave signal gand the radio wave signal coming in from the satellite.The carrieaccurately compute the distance to a satellite, which increases

GPS satellites transmit on a frequency of 1575.42 MHz.

583

erated by your GeoExplorer 3e. The code phase data is usedulate your position.


code phase (C/A code)(also known as Course Acquisition code)

The difference between the pseudorandom number code genand the pseudorandom number code coming in from the satellitto quickly compute the distance to a satellite and therefore calc

584

or a particular project or job. It isute information about these, line, and area feature.


data dictionaryA data dictionary is a description of the objects to be collected fused in the field to control the collection of the spatial and attribobjects. The elements of a data dictionary could include a point

585

eodetic datums are typicallyip between the center of the

ll provide a better model in someblished to suit particular regions.datum of 1950 (ED-50).

More...


datumA datum is a mathematical model of the earths surface. World gdefined by the size and shape of an ellipsoid and the relationshellipsoid and the center of the earth.

Because the earth is not a perfect ellipsoid any single datum wilocations than others. Therefore, various datums have been estaFor example, maps in Europe are often based on the European

586

an datum of 1927 or 1983-84 datum surface.

ral Reference, or see

Datum fittingNorth America

rface


Maps in the United States are often based on the North Americ(NAD-27, NAD-83). All GPS coordinates are based on the WGS

For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems GeneCoordinate systems.

Earth’s su

Datum fittingEurope

EuropeNorth

America

587
declinationSee magnetic declination.

588

lected on a rover with datanown location, any errors in datary corrections applied to the

S or after the data has been


differential correctionDifferential correction is the process of correcting GPS data colcollected simultaneously at a base station. Because it is on a kcollected at the base station can be measured, and the necessarover data.

Differential correction can be done in real-time differential GPcollected by postprocessing.

589

matically modeling the earthsmajor axes. The earths minor



ellipsoidAn ellipsoid is the 3D shape that is used as the basis for mathesurface. The ellipsoid is defined by the lengths of the minor andaxis is the polar axis and the major axis is the equatorial axis.


minoraxis

major axis

590

real world, and about which youcan be divided into points, linesis a line feature and a lake is an


featureA feature is a physical object or event that has a location in thewant to collect position and/or descriptive information. Featuresand areas. For example, a water faucet is a point feature, a roadarea feature.

Features are defined in a data dictionary.

591

was projected to extend throughmetrical surface, the geoid


Ellipsoid


geoidA geoid is a 3D surface representing mean sea level (MSL) if itthe continents. Unlike an ellipsoid or datum, which have a symundulates perpendicular to the force of gravity.


Geoid

Datum

592

sition, and “fix” (type of position)s from a GPS datalogger to


GGA messageA GGA message is a NMEA message containing GPS time, poinformation. GGA messages can be used to pass GPS positionmarine navigation equipment.

593

oints on the surface of a sphere.


great-circle distanceThe great-circle distance is the shortest distance between two p

594

HAE are actually giving theeights are collected in relation toring altitudes in HAE.


HAEHeight Above Ellipsoid

HAE is a method for referencing altitude. Altitudes expressed inheight above the datum. GPS uses the WGS-84 datum and all hthis surface. It is important to use the same datum when compa

595

measured clockwise from north.


headingThe heading is the direction you are facing or traveling, usually

596
horizonThe line at which the earth and sky seem to meet.

597

here is the band of chargedabove the surface of the earth.


ionospheric noiseThe effects that the ionosphere has on GPS signals. The ionospparticles 100 to 200 kilometers (60 to 125 miles approximately)

598

e earth to north or south of thelongitude coordinate system,

ed negative.


latitudeLatitude is an angular measurement made from the center of thequator. It comprises the north/south component of the latitude/which is used in GPS data collection.

Traditionally, north is considered positive, and south is consider

599

the earth to the east or west ofst/west component of thecollection.

negative.


longitudeLongitude is an angular measurement made from the center ofthe Greenwich meridian (London, England). It comprises the ealatitude/longitude coordinate system, which is used in GPS data

Traditionally, east is considered positive, and west is considered

600

nd true north. Declination is


magnetic declinationMagnetic declination is the difference between magnetic north aexpressed as an angle and differs between locations.

601
magnetic northUses the north magnetic pole as the reference to north.

602

es expressed in relation to MSL

in MSL.


Mean Sea Level (MSL)Mean Sea Level (MSL) is a method of altitude reference. Altitudactually give a height above the geoid.

It is important to use the same geoid when comparing altitudes

603

ing traveled different paths. Forilding, before reaching theistance to the satellite and

ral Reference.


multipathMultipath occurs when GPS signals arrive at the datalogger havexample, this may happen if some signals are reflected off a budatalogger. If a signal takes a longer path it will show a larger dtherefore decrease position accuracy.

For more information, refer to the GPS Mapping Systems Gene

604

he Clarke 1866 ellipsoid. Heightertical Datum) of 1929.


NAD-27North American Datum of 1927. A horizontal datum employing tvalues of this era are expressed in NGVD (National Geodetic V

605

the GRS-80 ellipsoid. Itspurposes, the NAD-83 and


NAD-83North American Datum of 1983. A horizontal datum employinggeometric definition is almost identical to the WGS-84. For GPSWGS-84 datums are identical.

606

nics Association (NMEA). Theiming and sentence formats forruments.

rine navigation instruments.


NMEANMEA is a standard, established by the National Marine Electrostandard defines electrical signals, data transmission protocol, tcommunicating navigation data between marine navigation inst

The GeoExplorer 3 uses these standards to communicate to ma

607

error checking that sums the 0’sf the bits is changed so that theat message transmission.

xplorer 3 as on the external


parityA digital message is composed of 0’s and 1’s. Parity is a form ofand 1’s of the digital message. A parity error results when one oparity calculated at message reception is not the same as it wasOptions for parity checking include even, odd, and none.

Typically you should have the same parity setting on your GeoEdevice you are communicating with.

608

n collected, in order to eliminaterover to data collected at the

be determined and removed


postprocessingPostprocessing is the processing of satellite data after it has beeerror. This involves using PC software to compare data from thebase station.

Because the base station is on a known location any errors canfrom the rover data.

609

smitted by GPS satellites, whichthat can be exactly reproduced.

used by the GeoExplorer 3 to


pseudorandom numberThe pseudorandom number (PRN) is the code of 0’s and 1’s tranappears to be random “noise”, but is actually a complex pattern

Each satellite has its own unique PRN code, which together arecalculate code phase (C/A code) positions.

610

a as you collect it. This ist to the data collector a fewposition it applies the corrections

e (C/A code) positions.


real-time differential GPS(also known as real-time differential correction, DGPS)

Real-time differential GPS is the process of correcting GPS datachieved by having corrections calculated at a base station senseconds in advance using a radio link. As the rover receives theto give you a very accurate position in the field.

Real-time differential correction is usually applied to code phas

611

ta in the field, typically at ancorrected relative to base station


roverA rover is any mobile GPS datalogger collecting or updating daunknown location. Data collected on a rover can be differentiallydata.

612

e real-time differential correctional correction message. However,col.


RTCMRadio Technical Commission for Maritime Services (RTCM)

A commission established to define a differential data link for thof roving GPS receivers. There are two types of RTCM differentiall Trimble GPS receivers use the newer version 2 RTCM proto

613
true northUses the north celestial pole as the reference to north.

614

t the greenwich meridian (GMT).


UTCUniversal Time Coordinated.

UTC is a time standard based closely on local solar meantime aGPS time is directly related to UTC.

615

ted as UTM, it consists of 60


UTMUniversal Transverse Mercator Map Projection.

A special case of the Transverse Mercator projection. Abbrevianorth/south zones, each 6 degrees wide in longitude.

616

nt direction of travel as well as


velocityVelocity is essentially a measure of speed, that takes into accouthe distance traveled over a period of time.

617

ed over ground.


VTG messageAn NMEA message containing actual track made good and spe

618

o attribute information beyond acts whose locations are often used for navigation.


waypointA waypoint is a geographical point that, unlike a feature, holds nname and location. Typically waypoints are used to denote objeprimary interest, such as a survey mark. Waypoints are most of

619

GS-84 has superceded WGS-72

e.


WGS-84WGS-84 is an abbreviation for World Geodetic System 1984. Was the datum used by GPS since January 1987.

The WGS-84 datum is based on the ellipsoid of the same nam

GeoExplorer 3 Opera

A C S U W Y# B D R T V X Z

620

SymboNumero key1, 2, 4, 5 ke keyd keyE keyf keyl keyn keym keys key

finitionfinition

finition

n formn form (Custom option)h

INDEINDEINDEINDE

tion Guide Index

E G I K M O QF H J L N P

ls andics

eys

.cor file format, de

.imp file format, de

.ssf file format, de2D altitude

GPS precisioGPS precisioproblems wit

3D GPS position

XXXX

GeoE

A S U W Y# R T V X Z

621

AabaAboAboacc

acc

add

st

n techniques

ns

r

field

date of

xplorer 3 Operation Guide Index

C E G I K M O QB D F H J L N P

ndoning an averaged vertexut buttonut screenessories

information aboutoptionalstandard

uracy, GPSsetting for area featuressetting for line featuressetting for point features

ingattributefeaturevalue to an attribute

adjustingbacklightscreen contra

advanceddata collectiofunctionslogging optio

Advanced modeGPS slider baGPS tab

alarmturn offwhen sounds

Allow GPS updatealmanac

definitionoverviewwhere to view

GeoE


622

altit

Altitangante

ante

area

nt features as wellw toa

PS Pathfinder Office, how to

yingying

ccuracyeters for allcuracyection toerval between logged GPS

w



udebase stationsetting referenceunits

ude info windowle units, settingnnagetting a clear view of the skyinternal, locationshowing type in usetype currently usedwhen to use an external antenna

nna heightbase stationenteringroverfeaturesSee also featurechanging settings for allcollecting averaged vertices for

collecting poicollecting, hocomputed arecontinuingcreating in Gdisplay unitslabels, displalabels, specifrepeatingsetting GPS asetting paramspecifying acspecifying dirspecifying int

positionsArrive in info windoattribute entry

formoption list

GeoE


623

attri esusing GPS Pathfinder Officeattributes

xplained

rated time attributes,

ing

withs bar

ure



butesaddingauto-incrementingcopyingdate, creating using GPS Pathfinder Officedefinitiondeletingdisplayingentering valuesentering values quickly see text completionfiltering bymarking as defaultmenu

creating using GPS Pathfinder Officecreating with a default value using GPS

Pathfinder Officenumeric, creating using GPS Pathfinder Officesearch byshowing for featuresshowing in data dictionary

showing valutext, creating

auto-incrementingdefiningstep values eturn on or off

automatically genetroubleshooting

automatically pannChart screenMap screen

averaged verticesabandoningbegin featureicon on statuloggingnew vertexoverviewsavingupdating feat

GeoE


624

BBacbac

bac

bas

htsfile

mation

al

data file

d

tilityorrecting data, how to



k button on Operation Guide CDkground files

renamingklight

adjustinghow to access settingsiconsettings

e data filescreatingdeletinginformation shown in message boxloggingnaming formulaopeningrenaming

base stationaltitudeantenna heigbase data filecreating basedefinitionentering inforformHere fieldlatitudelogging intervlongitudeopening baseoption listUnknown fielwaypoint

Base station fieldBatch Processor u

differentially c

GeoE


625

batt

batt

batt

bau

bauBeaBea

(BoB) receiver

ter kit, part numbers

are

ngw

ngeacon-on-a-Belt (BoB) receiver



erycamcorder

eryBoB receivercamcorder (part number)external power kiticoninternal

ery levelBoB receiverinternal battery

d ratesetting (input)setting (output)

d, definitioncon healthcon mode, of BoB receiver

Beacon-on-a-Beltbattery levelBeacon modeequipment lisexternal powoverviewPC-BoB softwstatus oftroubleshooti

Bearing info windobearing to satellitebearing, definitionbeep volume, settiBoB receiver see BBr(M)Br(T)

GeoE


626

butt get

start form)target form)

d file



onsAboutClose (Operation Guide CD)COMMSConfigurationsContents (Operation Guide CD)CoordinatesCreate new base fileCreate new fileData dictionariesFeatures settingsFormatsFwd (Operation Guide CD)GPSHelp (Operation Guide CD)LaterListList waypointsNewNew start point

New start tarNew targetNoneNone (SelectNone (SelectNowOpen selecteOtherUnits

GeoE


627

CC/Acab

cabcab

calib

Calicam

adaptor cable

ingugh data

tellites neededsegata collectedtures



code see code phase (C/A code) datale-free BoB

descriptionRTCM input

lesles

camcorder power adaptorpower/data splittervehicle power adaptorrationaccuracy of magnetic fieldscompass, problems withinternal compass

bration screencorder batterypart number

camcorder powerCancel keycarrier phase data

benefits of uscollecting enocounting timedefinitionnumber of saplanning to upostprocessinprecision of drecording feasettingusing in files

carrying pouchcautions

GeoE


628

cha

chaCha

ying

fore going into the fielddata collection)data update)r levellsw

peration Guide CD

to



ngingchart scale to display all selected layersconfigurationscoordinate orderdate formatdegrees formatinformation in info windowslanguagemap scalemap scale to display all selected layersoffsets formattime formattime zone

rt scale, changingrt screenautomatically panningoverviewspecifying layers to display

Chart tabinfo windowsoption listoverviewusing

check mark, displachecking

equipment beGPS status (GPS status (internal powememory leve

checklists, overvieclock informationClose (e) keyClose button on Oclose-up mode

Compass tabRoad tab

closing a file, how

GeoE


629

cod

codcoldCollCollcolle

COMCOM

lng

ager utility

tog



e phase (C/A code) datadefinitionsetting to use

e phase databoot

ect base data formect new data formctingarea feature, how todata (tutorial overview)feature using the Later button, how toline feature, how topoint feature, how toMS buttonMS form

compasscalibrationheadingrosetarget symbotroubleshootitypes

Compass screenCompass tab

info windowsoption listoverviewusing

configurationchanginglocking

Configuration Manoverviewstarting, how

configuration settin

GeoE


630

Concon

ConConConconcon

con

etting

nce

ystem Manager utilityg

on GeoExplorer 3

sferring

Manager utility



figurations buttonfiguring

coordinate systemselevation mask (GPS precision form)elevation mask (GPS precision form, Custom

option)PDOP mask (GPS precision form)PDOP mask (GPS precision form, Custom

option)SNR mask (GPS precision form)SNR mask (GPS precision form, Custom

option)nection Manager utilitytents button on Operation Guide CDtinue optiontinuing line and area featurestrast

decreasingincreasing

verting, GIS data to SSF format

coordinate order, scoordinate system

altitude referealtitude unitsconfiguringCoordinate Sdatum, settindatumsdefault geoidgeoidgeoid modelgrid files, tranLat/Longoverviewresettingselectingtransferringunitszone

Coordinate System

GeoE


631

coocooCooCooCoocoocop

copCreCre

in GPS Pathfinder Officery using GPS Pathfinder Officery, New option

in GPS Pathfinder OfficegsGPS Pathfinder Office

e with a default value in GPSffice

es in GPS Pathfinder Officeta fileswith a date attribute in GPSfficeGPS Pathfinder Office

in GPS Pathfinder Office

indow



rdinate systems, supplied on the GeoExplorer 3rdinate unitsrdinates buttonrdinates form (Setup tab)rdinates info windowrdinates, troubleshootingying

attributesdata dictionaryfeaturesvalues

yrightate new base file buttonate new file button

creatingarea featuredata dictionadata dictionadata filedate attributefeature settinline feature inmenu attribut

Pathfinder Omenu attributnew base dapoint feature

Pathfinder Oproject usingrover data filetext attributewaypoints

Cross track info wcross-track error

GeoE


632

curr

currCurcurs



ent GPS positionCompass tabGPS tabRoad screen

ent PDOP, viewingrent time info windowsormoving around the screenpanningturning offusing to create waypointsusing to select featuresusing to select features on mapusing to select waypoints

GeoE


633

Ddata

DATdatadataDatdata

g GPS Pathfinder Officery Editor utility

tures

S Pathfinder Office, how to

GeoExplorer 3, how toitor utility

ncrementing attributes



advanced collection techniquescollectingdifferentially correctingpostprocessingtransferring from GeoExplorer 3updatingupdating, list of what you need to do

A (d) keybits, specifyingcollector case

a dictionaries buttondictionaryattributes, showingcopyingcreating using GeoExplorer 3

creating usinData Dictionadeletingdisplaying feagenericoption listoverviewrenamingsaving in GPselectingtransferring to

Data Dictionary Edsetting auto-i

Data formDATA section

diagramFile tabMap tab

GeoE


634

data

Dat

data

data

date

dateOf

used

contrast

king asctorytting

ption



New taboverviewUpdate tabtransferspecifying the devicestatus

a Transfer utilityoverviewtransferring coordinate systemsupdatelist of what you need to dousing real-time differential corrections

/power splitter cablepinouts

feature was updatedformatattribute, how to create in GPS Pathfinder

fice

datumsavailabledefinitionoverviewsettingviewing datum

Declination fielddecreasing displaydefault

attribute, marresetting to fa

degrees format, seDelete file(s)

fieldlistoption list

Delete waypoints o

GeoE


635

dele

DGPDGPdiffe

courseackarea featuresline featuresingad screen

es byfar you are from original featureowield

ey



tingattributesbase data filesdata dictionaryfeature from mapfeature from Update feature listfeaturesfilefiles, how torover filesvalueswaypointsS mode, viewing Status tab inS status

rentially correcting dataoverviewtroubleshootingusing the Batch Processor utility

directionon course/offon track/off trspecifying tospecifying toto offset, settviewing on ro

display contrastdecreasingincreasing

distanceformatsorting featurwarning how

Distance info windDistance to point fdots, trail of

Chart tabMap tab

down arrow (5) k

GeoE


636

EEditEditEditEditEditedit

Elevelev

elevellip

htinformation

ributes

before going into the field

a GIS

conit, part numbersns, status ofpart numbers



configuration screendata dictionary formdata dictionary option listfeature settings listwaypoints option

ingattribute values for a featurefeature settingslocked fieldswaypoints

ation maskGPS precision formGPS precision form (Custom option)

ation, of satellitessoid, definition

Enter (E) keyentering

antenna heigbase stationnumberstextvalues for att

equipmentcheckingwhat to check

equipment listError rate fieldETA info windowExport utilityexporting, data toexternal antennaexternal antenna iexternal antenna kexternal connectioexternal power kit,

GeoE


637

Ffactfeat

mapUpdate feature listtting informationte valuesg before minimum timeted featuresappears on map listesbels

ngngpdateds form (lines and area features)s form (point features), using Compass tab

b)gcting using the cursorilar



ory defaults, resettingure

See also area featuresSee also line featuresSee also point featuresabandoningaddingbeginning with averaged vertexclearing as targetcollecting positions before startingcollecting using the Later button, how tocontinuingcopyingdate updateddefinitiondeleting

deleting fromdeleting fromdisplaying seediting attribuending logginfiltering updafiltering whatglobal changinformation la

displayispecifyi

marking as uname settingname settingnavigating tonumberoffset (New taoffset, creatinon map, selerecording sim

GeoE


638

as, for

, for

toow to

tory

to



recording using carrier phase datarepeatingsavingsearching for in Update feature listselecting using cursorselecting using the Map tabsetting area feature parameterssetting as targetsetting logging intervalsshowing attributes forshowing in data dictionarysorting by distancesorting by namesorting by time recordedspecifying accuracy for lines or areastime updatedupdating using Map tabviewingviewing GPS position

feature settingsbuttoncreatingdisplayingeditinglines and areoption listpoint features

filearea featuresclosingclosing, howcreate new, hcreatingcreating, howdata dictionadatedelete alldeletingdeleting, how

GeoE


639

file

ase filefiles

filected file

plied



last updatedline featureslockingnameNot in feature positionsopeningopening base filepoint featuresrenamingsizestatustime

format.cor, definition.imp, definition.ssf, converted to.ssf, definition

File tabBase stationcreate new bcreating newdelete filesopening baseopening seleoption listoverviewrename files

filename prefixesfilter

removingshowing if ap

Filter applied field

GeoE


640

filte

firm

flasflasFn kfontFormForm



ring featuresbased on

attribute valuescurrent statusnametime/date

on the map listremoving filters

wareinstallationstructure

hing number below satellite iconhing satellite iconey combinations

sats buttonats form

GeoE


641

form

ly being trackedyeration Guide CD



sattribute entryBase stationCollect base dataCollect new dataCOMMSCoordinatesDataEdit data dictionaryFeature name settings (lines and areas)Feature name settings (point features)FormatsGPS precision (advanced)GPS precision (custom)New waypointOtheroverviewReal-timeSelect target (Chart tab)Select target (Road tab)

Set all areasSet all linesSet all pointsUnits

Free space fieldfrequency, currentFunction (f) keFwd button on Op

GeoE


642

GgenGeo

ts

stsmessages

ar

ailableo the GeoExplorer 3

ionsttingghthootingto

port module



eric data dictionaryExplorer 3accessories, optionalaccessories, standardantenna heightcomponents

data collector pouchequipment listGeoExplorer 3 support moduleGPS Pathfinder Office softwarelanyardnull modem cableOperation Guide CDQuickStart quick reference cardserial clip

data collection system, explained

displayschecklisformslistsoption lipop-upscreensstatus bsublist

firmwarefree space avintroduction tkeysprimary functreceiver, resescreen backli

troublesturn on, howturning off

GeoExplorer 3 sup

GeoE


643

Geogeo

geoGGGGGIS

globglosGoGo

nsosition updates

ffice softwarehow to createry, how to savery, how to transferry, overview, how to createow to createe with default value, how to

e, how to createute, how to create



Explorer 3c editionid

default geoid on GeoExplorer 3definitiondeletinggeoid, explainedmodelspecifying the geoid model

metryA message, definitionA message, specifyingdataconverting to SSF formatexporting to a GIStransfer to GeoExplorer 3, how toview, how to

al changes to a feature typesary links in Operation Guide CDN/E info windowup info window

GPS buttonGPS data

logging optionot allowing pupdating

GPS Pathfinder Oarea feature,data dictionadata dictionadata dictionadate attributeline feature, hmenu attribut

createmenu attributnumeric attriboverview

GeoE


644

GPS

GPS

de

de

de

ing data collectioning data update

deto

gthde

ing



point feature with date attribute, how to createpoint feature, how to createprojectstext attribute, how to createPathfinder Office utilitiesConfiguration ManagerConnection ManagerCoordinate System ManagerData Dictionary EditorData TransferExportImportposition3Dcollecting before starting a featurecurrent, showing on compasstroubleshootingviewingviewing currentviewing quality of

GPS precision formAdvanced mocustom

GPS slider barAdvanced mocustomoverviewStandard mo

GPS statuschecking durchecking dur

GPS tabAdvanced modisplay, howoverviewsatellite strenStandard mo

GPS trailChart screen

grid files, transferr

GeoE


645

HHAEhardhea

HeaHelpHerhomhori



, definitionware status

dingdefinitionin Road tabshowing on compass

ding info windowbutton on Operation Guide CD

e fielde button

zon, definition

GeoE


646

Iicon

Imp

inco

contrast

rmation

n listcreen



sbacklightbatteryexternal antennainternal powerlockloggingMemoryon status barreal-time positionSatellitetarget

ort utilityoverviewstarting, how to

rrect coordinates

increasing displayinfo windows

AltitudeArrive inBearingchanging infoChart tabchecklistCoordinatesCross trackCurrent timeDistanceETAGo N/EGo upHeadingin Chart optioin compass s

GeoE


647

info

inpuInpuinst

inte

inte

ng

en feature GPS positions/line featuret featuresGeoExplorer 3 data collection

definition



in Road tabRoad signTurnVelocity

rmation labelsdisplayingspecifying

t baud rate, specifyingt level field

allationchanging to a different versionequipment requiredGeoExplorer 3 or GeoExplorer 3c firmwareupdating the firmwareusing the WinFlash software

rnal antennalocationusing an external antenna instead

rnal battery

internal compasscalibrationtroubleshooti

internal power iconinterval

settingsetting betwe

for areafor poin

introduction to thesystem

ionospheric noise,

GeoE


648

Kkey



s on GeoExplorer 3arrow keysCancelCloseDATAEnterFunction (Fn)LOGMenuNAVOPTIONpowerSYS

GeoE


649

Llabe

langlanyLasLat/Late

latit

laye

uretings for alloraged vertices for

nt features as wellng the “before” techniquegth

oegments

yingyingame changes to a particular



lsdisplayingspecifying

uage, settingardt RTCM fieldLong coordinate systemr buttonoverviewuse, how to

udebase stationdefinition

rsselecting what to display on the chartspecifying what to display on the map

left arrow (2) keyleft keylegal informationline features

See also featchanging setcollect, how tcollecting avecollecting poicollecting usicomputed lencreate, how tdividing into slabels, displalabels, specifmaking the s

feature type

GeoE


650

List

List

ettings

s)

ictionarysettings

re listrelative to the target

g

s and taskss using a password

res fieldld



Repeat optionrepeatingsegmentingsetting GPS accuracysetting parameters for allspecifying accuracyspecifying direction tospecifying interval between logged GPS

positions button

on Select start formon Select target form

waypoints button

listsDelete file(s)Edit feature soverviewpop-upRename file(ResetSelect data dSelect featureUpdate featu

location, displayingLock iconlocked fields, editinlocking

configurationconfigurationLock icon

Log (l) keyLog between featuLog PPRT data fie

GeoE


651

logg

logg

logglogglogg

logg



ingaveraged verticesbase file datavelocity data

ing GPS dataoptionspausingresumingspecifying interval for line and area featuresspecifying interval for point featureswarning distance

ing GPS positionsing iconsing intervalbase stationfor line/area featurefor point feature

ing options, advanced

longitudebase stationdefinition

loss of locklow memory

GeoE


652

Mmag

magMai

map

map

Update tab

SL)

ld

to

g GPS Pathfinder Office, how tovalue, creating using GPSffice



netic declinationdefinitionsetting

netic north, definitionn menu

overviewstructure

attributes, displaying in the Map windowscalespecifying layers to displaytypesscreenautomatically panningoverviewtypes

Map taboption listoverviewrelation to theusing

Mark fieldmean sea level (M

definitiongeoid

Measurements fiememory gaugeMemory iconmemory level

checking, howlow

menu attributescreating usinwith a default

Pathfinder OMenu key

GeoE


653

menmes

mes

minminMin

modMor

eoExplorer 3 Operation Guideevel)

ataeffects ofl antenna



u structuresage boxbase file informationbelow listscarrier phase data informationcomputing GPS positionsdata transferfile informationoverview ofposition/summary

sagesSee also problemspop-up

imum number of positions for point featuresimum positions, specifyingimum satellites field

GPS precision formGPS precision form (Custom option)

ee... indicator on Operation Guide CD

movingaround the G

MSL (Mean Sea Lmultipath

definitionlog velocity dremoving theusing externa

GeoE


654

NNADNADNAVNAV

nav

Compass tabompass tab

he Road screeng Compass tabuing line and area features

rt form (Compass tab)rt form (Road tab)et form (Compass tab)et form (Road tab)

ttontton

on



-27, definition-83, definition(n) keysectionChart tabCompass tabdiagramoverviewRoad tab

igatingaround the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide

CDfrom a start point

navigating tofeature usingtarget using Ctarget using twaypoint usin

nesting See continNew button

on Select staon Select staon Select targon Select targ

New start point buNew start target buNew tab

option listoverview

New target buttonNew waypoint formNew waypoint opti

GeoE


655

NM

NM

Non

Nor

NorNotnote

ature

, creating in GPS Pathfinder

nsic entry



EAdefinitionoutput interval, specifyingoutput, specifying the connection deviceoutputting, icon displayed

EA output optionsoffserial clipsupport module

e buttonon Select start formon Select start form (Compass tab)on Select target form (Compass tab)on Select target form (Road tab)

th indicator (N) fieldChart screenMap screen

th referencein features

Now buttonnull modem cable

pinoutsnumber, unique fenumbers, enteringnumeric attributes

Office, how tonumeric entry

multiple optiosingle numer

GeoE


656

OobsOffoff coff toffs

offs

On

activating

button

file

y



tructions blocking satellite signals(o) keyourseracket

a feature, how tocreating for a new featurecreating for a updated featuresetting direction tosetting horizontal distance tosetting vertical distance to

etscreating for features on update listformatoverview

(o) key

on courseon trackon-screen cursor,

Chart screenMap screen

Open selected fileopening

base fileselected data

Operation Guidecontents ofintroduction

Option (m) ke

GeoE


657

opti esGPS data

pecifyingignals



on listsAttribute entry formBase stationChart tabCompass tabcoordinatesData dictionariesDelete file(s)Edit data dictionaryEdit feature settingsFile tabGPS slider barGPS tabMap tabNew taboverviewRoad tabStatus tabUpdate attributeUpdate feature list

optional accessorioptions for loggingOther buttonOther formoutput baud rate, soutputting NMEA s

GeoE


658

Ppagpagpan

pari

part

pas

tion Management software

n formn form (Custom option)peration Guide CDperation Guide CD

plitter cableablesplitter cable

le



e downe upning

Chart screenMap screen

tydefinitionsetting

numbersBeacon-on-a-Belt receiver equipment listexternal antenna kitexternal power kitGeoExplorer 3 equipment list

swordsoverviewprotecting the configuration

pausing loggingPC-BoB ConfiguraPDOP

definitionGPS tab

PDOP maskGPS precisioGPS precisio

PgDn button on OPgUp button on Opinouts

data/power snull modem cRTCM/NMEAserial clipsupport modu

GeoE


659

poin

poppop

troubleshootingtadata required for

ngfinitionle

) key

cablehooting



t featuresSee also featureaccuracychanging settings for allcollecting while recording line or area featurescollecting, how tocreating in GPS Pathfinder Office, how tohow to createlabels, specifyingminimum number of positionsnumber of positions loggedsetting GPS accuracysetting logging intervalsetting parameters for allsetting point feature parametersspecifying accuracywith date attribute

creating in GPS Pathfinder Office-up lists-up messages

position precision,postprocessing da

logging extraoverviewtroubleshooti

postprocessing, depower adaptor cabpower keypower level

overviewproblems with

Power On/Off (opower source

leveltypes

power statuspower, external kitpower/data splitterprecision, troubles

GeoE


660

prel

prepPrinprob

rential correction link is not

erentially correct positions wheningth GeoExplorer 3sing GPS Pathfinder Office

mber



ogging data techniquehow to use preloggingoverview

aring for data collectiont button on Operation Guide CDlemautomatically generated Time attributes are

incorrectcoordinates displayed by the GeoExplorer 3

appear to be incorrectGeoExplorer 3 is not displaying a GPS

positionGeoExplorer 3 is not tracking satellitesGeoExplorer 3 screen is hard to readGeoExplorer 3 will not turn on, or turns off

immediately after being turned oninternal compass does not appear to be

workingprecision of recorded GPS positions is less

than was expected

real-time diffeworking

unable to diffpostprocess

using BoB wiproject, creating uproximity alarm

Road tabturn off

pseudorandom nudefinitionof satellite

GeoE


661

QQuiQui



ckStart quick reference cardt button on Operation Guide CD

GeoE


662

Rreal

real

ReaRearebo

recereco

on Guide CDw

stemsries

sry

s



-timecorrected positions, receivingdifferential correction

troubleshootingdifferential GPSsettingsstatus

-time corrected positionssmoothing

l-time forml-time position iconotingcoldwarm

iver, resettingrding area/line/point features together

red text in Operatireference, overvierelease noticeremoving

coordinate sydata dictionafilters

Rename file(s) listrenaming

base data filedata dictionafilesrover files

Repeat modeRepeating feature

GeoE


663

rese

resurighroadroadroadRoaRoa

rove

ing the connection deviceteter cable



ttingcoordinate systemsfactory defaultsfor upgrade of firmwareGPS receiverparameters

ming loggingt arrow (4) key

navigation screenscale, settingscreen, viewing direction

d sign info windowd tabinfo windowsoption listoverview

rantenna heightdefinition

rover data filescreatingdeletingopeningrenaming

RTCMage limitbaud ratedefinitioniconinput, specifyword error ra

RTCM/NMEA splitpinouts

GeoE


664

Ssate

satesatesate

sate

blocking

lay of positionsed for carrier phase databeing computedits

th graphbleshooting

tices



llitecurrent elevationfrequencyPRNSNRstrength

llite geometryllite geometry indicatorllite iconflashingnumber below flashing

llite informationviewing graphicallyviewing textually

satellite signalslosingobstructions

satellite, bearing tosatellites

graphical dispnumber needpositions notpredicting orbsignal strengtracking, trou

savingaveraged ver

screenbacklightcontrast

screen scaleChart screen

GeoE


665

scre s (Map tab)s (Update tab)

charts

aturesary listings list

(Chart tab)(Road tab)nn (Compass tab)n (Road tab)



ensAboutCalibrationChartCompassEdit configurationfactory defaultsGPS Advanced modeGPS Standard modemapoverviewresetreset receiverroad navigationSelectSelect startSelect targetStatus tab in DGPS modeStatus tab in Standard modeupgrade firmware

Search for featureSearch for featuresections

DATANAVsummary flowsummary ofSYS

segmentsegmenting line feSelect data dictionSelect feature settSelect screenSelect start optionSelect start screenSelect target formSelect target formSelect target optioSelect target screeSelect target scree

GeoE


666

sele

seri

seriSetSetSet

parameters for selected feature

derstem

atyfeatureseaturest features

arameters for selected featureal (line and area features)al (point features)nt



ctingcoordinate systemdata dictionaryfeatures on map using the cursorfeatures using the cursorlayers to display on the chartlayers to display on the maptargetwaypoints using the cursor

al clipdata transferNMEA outputoverviewpart numberpinoutsRTCM input

al number, viewingall areas formall lines formall points form

settingarea featurebaud ratebearing anglebeep volumecoordinate orcoordinate sydate formatdatumdegrees formGPS accurac

for areafor line ffor poin

languageline feature plogging intervlogging intervoffset directiooffsets forma

GeoE


667

SetushoShoShoShosignsign

sky,skypsmo

n formn form (Custom option)-noise ratio (SNR)

om GIS data formatto format suitable for GIS

IS data to

r



point feature parameters for selected featurescreen contrastscreen contrast (decreasing)screen contrast (increasing)time formattime zonep tab

ulder carrying pouchw attributes optionw features optionw values optional strength bar graphal-to-noise ratio (SNR)GPS tabof DGPS signalStatus tab (DGPS mode)

getting a clear viewlotothing

SNR maskGPS precisioGPS precisio

SNR see signal-tosorting featuresspecificationssplitter cablessf file format

conversion frconversion in

systemsconverting G

Standard modeGPS slider baGPS taboverviewStatus tab

start pointnoneselecting

GeoE


668

Statstat

stat

Statstat

Stat

stopsub

t



ion IDus

data transferexternal connections

us baroverview

us fieldus information

viewing graphicallyviewing textually

us tabDGPS modeoverviewStandard modebits, specifying

lists

support moduledata transferNMEA outpupinoutsRTCM input

SYS (s) keySYS section

diagramGPS taboverviewSetup tabStatus tab

System fieldsystem overview

GeoE


669

Ttabs

re as, using Compass tab, using the road screend

g cursorg the Select target option

e as

een

to create in GPS Pathfinder



ChartCompassFileGPSMapNewRoadSetupStatussummaryUpdate

targetclearing featunavigating tonavigating tonone selecteselectingselecting usinselecting usinsetting featur

target nameCompass scrRoad screen

taskslock iconlocking

text attributes, howOffice

GeoE


670

text

texttime

timetimetipstractrailtran

stemsry from GPS Pathfinder Office tor 3, how toof files lefteoExplorer 3eoExplorer 3, how to



completionaccepting suggested textdeleting matchesdisablingenablingexplainedreset list

, entering

changing formatfeature was updatedsorting features byattributes, troubleshootingzone, setting

king satellites, troubleshootingof dots, in Chart tabsfer status

transferringcoordinate sydata dictiona

GeoExplorefiles, numberGIS data to GGIS data to Ggrid filesoverview

GeoE


671

trou

trueTurnturn

turn

n

collectionupdate



bleshootingautomatically generated time attributesBeacon-on-a-Belt receivercoordinatesGeoExplorer 3 screenGPS positioninternal compassposition precisionpostprocessingreal-time differential correction linktracking satellitesturning GeoExplorer on and off

north, definitioninfo window

ing on and off the GeoExplorer 3troubleshooting

ing on the GeoExplorer 3

tutorialdata collectiodata updateoverviewpreparing forpreparing forscenario

GeoE


672

Uuniqunit

UnitUnitUnkup aUpd

res

featuresesposition of feature

g the Map tabg the Update tab

u need to doosition updatese differential correctionsption

lorer 3 data collection system



ue feature numbers

altitudecoordinate system

s buttons formnown fieldrrow (1) keyate attribute option list

Update feature listdeleting featufilteringoption listoverviewsearching forsorting featurviewing GPS

Update tabupdating

attributesfeatures usinfeatures usinGPS data

updating datalist of what yonot allowing pusing real-tim

Use last 3D GPS ousing the GeoExp

GeoE


673

UsinUTCutilit

UTMUTM



g the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide, definition

iesConfiguration ManagerConnection ManagerCoordinate System ManagerData Dictionary EditorData TransferExportImportcoordinate system

, definition

GeoE


674

Vvalu

vehvelovelo

velo

Velo

ewing

ture with

rmationes

feature in the Map window

position

’re going in on the road screengsgs informationlected data dictionary



esadding to an attributecopyingdeletingdisplayingentering for attributesshowing in data dictionary

icle power adaptor cablecities, loggingcitydefinitionspecifying units for

city filterturning onusing to smooth real-time positions

city info window

version number, vivertex iconvertices, averaged

abandoningbeginning fealoggingoverviewsaving

viewingalmanac infoattribute valuattributesattributes of acheck markcurrent GPScurrent PDOPdirection youfeature settinfeature settinfeatures in se

GeoE


675

VTG



features on mapGIS dataGPS position of featureGPS screenheading on the road screeninformation about features, attributes, and

valuesinformation about GeoExplorer 3quality of GPS positionssatellite geometrysatellite information, textuallysatellite positions, graphicallyserial numbersignal strengthversion numbermessagedefinitionspecifying

GeoE


676

WwarWarwarway

WG



m bootning distance fieldningspointbase stationbase station reference positionChart screen, displayed oncreating newcreating using cursordefinitiondeletingeditingnavigating to, using Compass tabselecting to navigate fromselecting using cursor

S-84, definition

GeoE


677

ZZonzoozoo



e fieldming (Chart screen)ming (Map screen)

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Legal information

Legal informationLegal informationLegal informationLegal informationCopyright and Trademarks

© 1999–2001 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.

The Sextant logo with Trimble, GeoExplorer, and GPS Pathfinder are trademarks of Trimble NavigationLimited, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

The Globe & Triangle logo, Trimble, and BoB are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Release Notice

This is the March 2001 release (Revision A) of the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide. It applies to version1.20 of the GeoExplorer® 3 software.

Function keys

Troubleshooting

If GPS positions are not being logged, moveaway from obstructions, wait until more satellitesare in view, or change the GPS settings toinclude more satellites.

RebootingWARNING – A cold boot will erase all data andreset all configurations to factory defaults!Warm bootIf the GeoExplorer 3 will not respond:Hold down o to turn GeoExplorer 3 off.Turn GeoExplorer 3 on again.Cold bootIf still no response repeat warm boot. At thestart-up screen, hold down E and d untilFormatting Flash Sys appears.

fe Cancel—close screen andabandon changes

fm Menu—display the Main menu

fs Lighten screen display

fd Backlight mode (On/Bright/Off)

fn Darken screen display

f1 Page up / Pan up

f5 Page down / Pan down

f2 Home / Pan left

f4 End / Pan right

©19

99–2

001

Trim

ble

Nav

igat

ion

Lim

ited.

Allr

ight

sre

serv

ed.T

heG

lobe

&Tr

iang

lelo

go,a

ndTr

imbl

e,ar

etra

dem

arks

ofTr

imbl

eN

avig

atio

nLi

mite

d.Th

eSe

xtan

tlog

ow

ithTr

imbl

e,an

dG

eoEx

plor

er3,

are

trade

mar

ksof

Trim

ble

Nav

igat

ion

Lim

ited,

regi

ster

edin

the

Uni

ted

Stat

esPa

tent

and

Trad

emar

kO

ffice

.

Status bar icons

Number of satellites in use.If number flashes—too few satellites.If satellite flashes—poor geometry.

GPS positions are real-time corrected.Flashes if RTCM signal is lost.

External antenna is connected and in use.

Some configuration settings are passwordlocked.

Memory is low.

The backlight is on.

The bright backlight is on.

Internal power level indicator. “Fills up”when charging. Flashes when power levelis low.

Code precision data logging—the numbershows how many positions have beenlogged. Flashes when GPS unavailable.

Carrier precision data logging.

Logging is paused. Press l toresume.

GPS tab

NOTE – When the skyplot is fixed to North up,calibrate the digital compass.

Satellite legendBlack boxes: Satellite used to compute GPS

positions.Clear boxes: Satellite tracked but not used.No boxes: Satellite available but not tracked.A Signal strength: Satellites with signalstrengths below the configured SNR mask arenot used.B Skyplot: Outer circle shows the horizon. Innercircle shows the configured elevation mask.Satellites below the elevation mask are not used.C Satellite geometry: GPS quality depends onthe geometry (PDOP) of the satellites. If thequality falls below the cutoff level then GPSpositions will not be computed.D Current position: Displays the current GPSposition.

A

B

D

C

FFFF

GeoExplorer 3 QuickStart

Part Number 38598-00-ENG, Rev B

Keys

CLOSE Close the current screen(and save changes)

ENTER Select highlighted itemOPTION Display more functionsSYS Go to / cycle SYS tabsDATA Go to / cycle DATA tabsNAV Go to / cycle NAV tabsFn Use second key function (blue)

(see Function keys)LOG Pause/Resume loggingo Power On/Off

CLOSE

CANCEL MENU

OPTION

ENTER

LOG

Fn

SYS NAV

DATA

Moving around the system Section / Tab layout

Tabs

SYS DATA NAV

Sections

s d nPress these keys to move betweensections. Multiple presses move to

the next tab in that section.

mPress this key to access all functions

for the current screen.

f + mPress this key combination to display

the Main menu, an overview of allsections and tabs.

Accessing options

Main menu

sGPS tab SETUP tabSTATUS tab

Configuration Datadictionary

Featuresettings

ResetAbout

DataGPS

Real-timeCoordinates

Units COMMSOther

Logginginterval

Accuracy Minimumpositions/Offset

Formats

NEW tab MAP tabUPDATE tab

FILE tab

dDelete fileBase station

UPDATE tab

ROAD tab CHART tabCOMPASS tab

n

Waypoints Waypoints Waypoints

Documents

GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide - Portland State Universityweb.pdx.edu/~emch/gps/Geo3.pdf · GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide Using the GeoExplorer 3 Operation Guide ... can transfer to